Btcino Scs

BTicino SpA
Viale Borri, 231
www.bticino.com
21100 Varese - Italy
BTicino S.p.A. reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet
AD-EXMH16GT/GB - Edition 03/2016 and to communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
Guidelines for design and installation 2016
AND INSTALLATION
DESIGN
GUIDELINES FOR
INTRODUCTION
LIGHTS AND AUTOMATION
ENERGY MANAGEMENT Temperature control – Consumption Display

Load control management
SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND CONTROL
CATALOGUE
Contents MyHOME
MyHOME Contents
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Introduction to the light system and shutter automation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Control devices for lights management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Control devices for the management of lights and automations
(shutters, curtains, etc.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Control devices - scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Control devices: table for selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Actuator devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Actuator devices - lighting control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Actuator devices for shutters, curtains automation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Actuator devices: actuators selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
BUS system extension with ZigBee radio devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
General concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Examples of configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Maximum number of devices which can be configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Logical expansion of the addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Addressing levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Main operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Examples of configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Configuration by MyHOME Suite of scenarios stored in the MH202 scenarios
programmer and activated by movement/presence sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . 52
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Maximum distances and absorptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Brightness and movement/presence sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Contents MyHOME
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Lighting management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Management of different loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Window and shutter management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Management of dimmed lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Lighting and shutter management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
The devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Maximum number of devices, maximum distances and absorptions. . . . . . . 99
Combining with other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Correct mode of installation for 4 zone control unit,
probes and magnetic contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Layout of solenoid valves and actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Symbol legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Villas and 4-zone homes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Service sector, 12 zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Integration with systems of other manufacturers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
General concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
ENERGY CONSUMPTION DISPLAY

General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Displaying consumptions and the production data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Measurement and display devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Consumptions displaying through MyHome_Web portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT

Main features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
No more outages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Operation of the load control and management system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Device selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Maximum number of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
System sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
MyHOME Contents
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Display of electricity, water and gas consumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Display of three-phase and three-phase load total consumption. . . . . . . . . 188
Display of balance of photovoltaic energy produced
and electricity consumed - three-phase system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Display of electricity consumption of several lines via Energy Data Logger. . . 192
Display of seven generic electric consumptions, energy consumption
for water (from volume counter) and heating (from heat meter) . . . . . . . . . 194
Display of energy produced and consumed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Display of energy produced and consumed in exchange mode on the spot. 197
Display of balance of photovoltaic energy produced and electricity
consumed via Energy Data Logger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Display of thermal power/hot water consumption by individual home. . . . . 200
Load control and management with display of total consumption . . . . . . . 201
Load control and management with display of total loads and diagnostics . . 202
Three-phase and single-phase load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
FUNCTIONS INTEGRATION AND CONTROL

General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Functions integration:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Integration between different MyHOME systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Integration between MyHOME and systems of other manufacturers . . . . . . 211
System control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Local control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Remote control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
MyHOME_Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
MyHOME_Web - Installer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
MyHOME_Web - Customer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
System layout for the use of the MyHOME_Web services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
MyHOME_Web – Creation and configuration of the Customer Area. . . . . . . 246
MyHOME_Web - Creation of the Customer Area:
operations to be performed in the Installer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
operations to be performed on the control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Automation system integration with the temperature control system
and functions remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
CATALOGUES
MyHOME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Contents MyHOME
2 MyHOME Introduction
CONTENTS
MyHOME – INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction MyHOME 1
GENERAL FEATURES
HOME AUTOMATION
Through a wide range of devices energy efficiency class for buildings, different devices gives the freedom
MyHOME offers simple and efficient required by the European Standard to choose which applications
solutions to meet safety, comfort, EN 15232. install immediately and which to
energy saving and communication Through the use of intelligent integrate in the future without
needs which are applicable in any and programmable electronic major structural works and with an
type of home and tertiary sector. devices MyHOME makes advanced excellent cost management.
My HOME is also the answer to features, difficult to achieve in MyHOME uses the 2-wire twisted
the latest low energy consumption a traditional electrical systems, pair BUS installation technology
requirements in buildings; its become accessible in a simple and and can also be integrated
different applications in fact allow personalized way. in different systems such as,
the creation of systems that meet Moreover, its installation modularity for example, KNX and DALI.
the requirements of the highest and the functional integration of Furthermore, through dedicated
Temperature Lights
control control
probe
Power supply
8-key control Touch screen functions with

and lights general control consumption displaying
interfaces and use of TCP/IP
protocol, MyHOME is able to:
manage the functions of the NUVO
digital audio system;
integrate with devices and
systems of other manufacturers;
manage and monitor your home
even remotely using a landline,
or mobile phone or an Internet
connection.
NUVO audio system
Systems of other manufacturers
- Hitachi
- Daikin
- Mitsubishi
- other....
LAN
2 WIRE Bus network
Gateway
Internet
Devices
for remote
control of
MyHOME_Screen 10: device for
central control of all the functions
GENERAL FEATURES
SAFETY
COMFORT
LIGHTING AND GENERAL LOADS MANAGEMENT OF SCENARIOS 3

MANAGEMENT1 manual or automatic activation
light intensity adjustment, depending on events or conditions,
lights switching on and off lighting, motorized shutters,
singly, in groups or in general, sound system and ideal
management of LEDs, dimmable environment temperature.
compact fluorescent lamps (CFL),
halogen energy saving lamps. elec-
tronic transformers and 0-10 ballasts.
WINDOW AND SHUTTER MANAGEMENT 1

control of curtains and shutters
singly, in groups or in general,
recalling of a preset
position.
control of watering systems
and other systems with maximum
flexibility and simplicity.
General control 8-key control

actuator
FOR MORE INFORMATION REFER TO THE SECTION: 1 Automation, 2 Sound system, 3 System integration and control.
4
Burglar-alarm system, 5 Energy management - Temperature control, 6 Energy Management-Consumption Display
7
Energy Management-Load control 8 Video door entry system, 9 System integration and control
ENERGY MANAGEMENT CENTRAL CONTROL
OF THE FUNCTIONS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
AND AIR CONDITIONING 5 LOCAL CONTROL 9
temperature control use of Touch screen devices,
differentiated by zones (max. 99). use of mobile devices
management of radiator systems, (Ipad and Iphone) provided with a
fan coils and radiant panels with ON/ specific App MyHOME.
OFF and proportional 0-10V valves,
splitter management. REMOTE CONTROL 9
management home automation
CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT 6 functions by telephone commands
instantaneous display of water, or direct connection to the system
gas and electricity consumptions, via the Internet,
accounting and quantitative MyHOME_Web service for
assessment of the economic cost. management through customized Web
pages and specific APP for Android
LOADS MANAGEMENT 7 and iOS devices
management of the power consumption
of household appliances in order to
prevent activation of the limiter.
MyHOME_Screen 3,5: Touch screen MyHOME_Screen 10

daily power for local management of all functions
consumption graph
GENERAL FEATURES
: AN OPEN SYSTEM
My Home is an open system that device configured for interfacing, even the NUVO sound system using
easily integrates, without any through the TCP/IP protocol, of MyHOME control devices such as for
changes to the system, with the temperature control systems such example, the 8-key control and the 4
best technologies and third-party as Mitsubishi Electric, Daikin etc .. scenarios control.
systems and devices. All the heating and cooling functions
This is achieved in two ways: can be operated by Touch screen
by means of the MyHOME_Link and by probes or thermostats for
integration platform which involves each zone of the system. In the
the use of the Driver Manager F459 same way it is possible to manage
NUVO audio system
Systems of other manufacturers:
Air conditioning
LAN systems
BUS Network
Lighting
with RGB lamps
Driver manager F459
Weather stations
and sensors
management
through the use of a

communication protocol called
Open Web Net (Open Protocol for
Electrical
Network) developed by Bticino and
made available through the MyOpen
Community for integration with
standard Konnex, BACNET, DALI
and TCP / IP devices.
For more information visit the Web
website http://www.professionisti. Server
bticino.it/integrazione_myhome/ DALI dimmer actuator

DALIdimmer
TCP/IP
Lighting management Supervision Internet commu- Supervision
in the service sector nication monitoring
BUS TECHNOLOGY
Control DIN module Built-in BUS

actuator actuator
FEATURES
BUS technology is based on the use of devices connected to each other by a cable (BUS)
with two conductors, used for the transport of information and low voltage power supply (27 Vdc).
Through appropriate interfaces, the MyHOME BUS systems can be easily integrated into BUS
systems with different communication protocols such as Konnex standard, Dali etc. and extended with
radio ZigBee control devices.
DEVICES CONFIGURATION
TV/SAT
Crossover Web Server

Ethernet
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
1 Configuration 2 Physical configuration using

with programming plug-in devices
software BUS cable called configurators
GENERAL FEATURES
AN INTERFACE FOR EVERY NEED
BASIC CONTROLS
Basic control Soft touch control Scenario control
Capacitive control Remote control Control with badge transponder

and IR receiver
Interacting with MyHOME recalling preconfigured scenarios

is easy and intuitive, thanks to with the pressure of simple buttons,
the wide range of digital devices to the great potential offered by the
ranging from the simple immediacy most sophisticated and complete
of basic commands, that enable the devices such as Touch Screen
command of lights or shutters or controls.
PRESENCE
SENSORS
MyHOME_Screen 10 represents the

latest example of innovation and
technological evolution as it allows
to use customizable icon menus
to manage all home automation
functions and enjoy multimedia
content from other external devices
Passive infrared sensor for IR sensor of Green Switch and from the Internet.
the detection of movement series for evolved lighting The device can also be used as video
and the lighting level management
handset.
TOUCH SCREEN
DEVICES
Local display 1.2 MyHOME_Screen 3.5 MyHOME_Screen 10
ADVANCED CENTRAL CONTROL DEVICES

VIDEO HANDSETS BY LAN NETWORK AND INTERNET
AXOLUTE Video display Mobile Vocal IPad with MyHOME application

with menu for management of access access with BTicino for functions
home automation functions SMS message local control.
GENERAL FEATURES
DRESS AS YOU WANT
The originality of the MyHOME The functions are in fact built into This page shows some aesthetic
system is the perfect integration the device and can be "dressed" combinations; for a full and detailed
in the AXOLUTE, LIVINGLIGHT and with the same aesthetic of the whole understanding of all the available
MATIX series to create synergy and electrical system; from the simple finishes consult the catalogs of
harmony among the devices in the digital control to the most evolved individual series.
system and the decor of the house. Touch device.
White Cobalt Green tea Coffee brown
Maple Titanium graphite Deep green Satin nickel
White NIGHTER Cherrywood Anthracite

AXOLUTE
Aesthetic combinations DEVICES COMMON
TO THE THREE SERIES
White
device
Square
Cover plate
Ivory
Standard burglar Video handset
alarm Polyx Memory Display
central unit
White Tech gray Anthracite

device device device
Round Air Square Living Inter-

Cover Cover Cover national
Palladium plate plate plate cover plate
White Tech gray Anthracite

device device device
MyHOME_Screen 10
Elliptical Square Air

Cover Cover Cover
plate plate plate
Mat white
GENERAL FEATURES
MyHOME_Web: PORTAL FOR REMOTE

HOME MANAGEMENT.
HOME - MyHOME system REMOTE ACCESS
System Web
MyHOME
ADSL
Control with Access
Access through PC SMS messages through APP
Web server ADSL Modem for Android and
iOS devices.
MyHOME_Web is an innovative MyHOME_Web IS DIVIDED INTO TWO AREAS:

service which allows to remotely
control the functions of the 1 Installer Area 2 Customer Area
MyHOME system and be promptly dedicated to the MyHOME installer aimed exclusively to those who are
informed of any alarm which may to register the systems made. interested in the Telemanagement,
occur. Following customer’s request, i.e. the remote control of all
By using a Smartphone or a PC the installer can activate the Remote MyHOME home automation
connected to the Internet, it will be Assistance service, which gives the functions. This area allows to have
possible to interact remotely with possibility of remotely monitoring exclusive services which can only be
the system. the home, and receive real time realized with the portal (notifications
notifications in case of faults. in case of danger, web scenarios
activation, etc.).
For more information, see the Home automation section of MyHOME Web Site www.bticino.com
CONNECTION SAFETY AND PROTECTION

The most stringent security policies For the characteristics
were adopted in the development described, the service
of the MyHOME_Web portal has been certified
to ensure high levels of: ISO27001 "Information
data protection from technology - Security
unauthorized access; management systems".
safeguard of the accuracy
and completeness of the information;
accessibility of data and information
when required.
ENERGY SAVING WITH MyHOME
SAVING ENERGY HAS NEVER BEEN SO EASY.
MyHOME,
THE WINNING
COMBINATION
Displaying information on energy aware of their energy use, be it
consumption and managing to meet their “green aspirations”
and controlling energy loads; or their desire to make financial
this is whatTHE NEW MyHOME savings.
solutions deliver to end users -
making them very much more
VISIBILITY DRIVES
SAVINGS results in users changing there
An aware user is one that saves
(bad) routines or correcting faults
with resulting benefits for the
which result in savings of 10 to 15%.
environment and in reduced
costs. Studies have shown that
displaying energy consumption
MyHOME_Screen 10
WITH MyHOME
IT IS POSSIBLE
Create a living space with

maximum comfort, only using
the necessary energy and heat..
Improve the energy class of
the building, and therefore also
of its economic value.
MyHOME_Screen 3.5
13
GENERAL FEATURES
TO ENSURE ENERGY EFFICIENCY.

WITH MyHOME IT'S EASY
BUS-SCS MyHOME
TV/SAT IPTV
HEATING ONLY WHEN

AND WHERE NEEDED.
Using this function, the user can decide the temperature
antifurtoZone temperature
termoregolazione of each individual
videocitofonia controlloroom based
lan on its usecarichi
controllo and the time
energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
control of day. It is also possible to select the rooms that are
not being used, and therefore don’t need to be heated.
The activation of the system also takes into account the
heat produced by the sun and by any open door (optional UP TO
function). Thanks to the zone temperature control
function the building gains an energy class,
30%
SAVINGS
and users save on the bill.
For details see the TEMPERATURE CONTROL chapter
SWITCH OFF THE LIGHT,

SWITCH ON ENERGY SAVINGS
UP TO
75%
Management of lighting level depending on the
energia
Light automation
luci tvcc www irrigazione
management presence of people and the level of natural light:
this means maximum visual comfort for the SAVINGS
users, and a big contribution to energy savings.
In the service sector, savings from 55% up to 75%
are possible.
For details see the LIGHTS AND AUTOMATION
chapter
BUS-SCS MyHOME
TV/SAT IPTV
A COMPLETE CONSUMPTION AND

ENERGY PRODUCTION CHECK-UP.
The user can display on the touch screen not only the
Display consumptions inside their home (power, water and gas),
ne videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
visualization but also the energy and hot water output obtained using
photovoltaic or solar panels.
With a few simple steps, the user can select the type of
consumption that needs to be checked, the type of display
UP TO
15%
(instantaneous or graphs), and the period (day, month,
year). Extremely useful information, for using one’s own
SAVINGS systems at their best, reducing waste and faults.
For details see the ENERGY CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
chapter
TV/SAT IPTV
THE END OF THE BLACK-OUT.

This function can be used to manage the maximum
power to be used, and automatically disconnect the
termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan Management
controllo carichi least important
energia luci appliances
tvcc in case ofwww
overload. Using
irrigazione
of loads
the Touch screens, the user can check the total
consumption of the individual circuit, and decide if the
priorities need changing. The user can also decide to
delay the activation of a particular load.
For details see the LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT
chapter
GENERAL FEATURES
ENERGY EFFICIENCY MANAGEMENT DEVICES

OVERVIEW
Splitter
Probe Probe con display
Splitter
management
interface
Heating system
99 zone central unit

Electric distribution board
Room-by-room temperature control

ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL AIR CONDITIONING
Splitter management Splitter

interface
Probe
MyHOME_Screen 3.5
Washing machine
Photovoltaic Solar thermal

panel panel
Microwave oven
Flush mounted
Infrared sensor
16A actuator
Electricity
meter
Pulse counter
interface
Actuator
Pulse counter Pulse counter

interface interface
MyHOME_Screen 3.5
Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output
Automatic switching off of heating when windows are Irrigation management

CONSUMPTION AND
opened
PRODUCTION DISPLAY
m3/€
m3/€
KWh/€
MyHOME_Screen 3.5 KWh

Load control central unit
Kcal
18 MyHOME Lights and Automation
CONTENTS
MyHOME – Lights and Automation
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Lights and Automation MyHOME 19

GENERAL FEATURES
Introduction to the light system and shutter automation

The MyHOME Automation system controls, connected only to the
Properly choosing and configuring
allows you to manage functions in BUS cable; the devices, it is possible to perform
a simultaneous and integrated way. Actuators, connected to the BUS
the following functions:
To date, these functions have been cable and to the 230 Vac power
performed with special and complex line for managing the connected LIGHTING MANAGEMENT
electrical devices such as: load. Traditional incandescent lamps, LED,
lighting control
If it is required to expand an existing halogen and fluorescent lamps can
control for shutters and/or electric
system without performing masonry be easily managed with ON/OFF and
curtains. work, the system can be expanded DIMMER mode to fulfill comfort and
There are two types of devices in with wire/radio interfaces and ZigBee energy saving needs.
the system: radio control devices.
Wire system
Basic contacts General Touch control

interface control 8-key control (SOFT TOUCH)
Traditional
device
Power supply
230 Vac
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT
Actuator Dimmer actuator Shutter
DIN module DIN module actuator control
TV/SAT automazione diffusione sonora

IPTV
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia automazione
luci diffusione
tvcc
sonora antifurto
www termoregolazione
irrigazione videocitofonia controllo
Shutters Lights Shutters
The MyHOME Automation system devices are IMQ certified, as they comply with the CEI EN 50428 standard “non-automatic control devices for fixed electrical home
installations and similar uses”.

AUTOMATION OF SHUTTERS, LIGHTS SCENARIO AND shutters to create situations of
CURTAINS, AND VARIOUS AUTOMATION comfort responding to the user's
DEVICES The system may be configured to lifestyle. The room can also be set
It is also possible to manage the execute a series of simultaneous with a musical background and the
movement of shutters, curtains, operations acting on a single control desired temperature if the system is
doors and other motorized devices. In device or on the menu of a Touch integrated with the Sound system
addition to the UP/DOWN (or OPEN/ Screen. and Temperature Control systems.
CLOSE) mode, either monostable This function is normally called The feasible solutions in this field are
or bistable, it is possible to store "scenario". For example, it is possible varied.
and recall a desired position of to simultaneously turn on some
the controlled load (Preset) acting lights in a room with different levels
directly on the actuator, on a Touch of brightness and opening some
screen etc.
Radio/wire interfaces Radio system
Interface Radio
Local control Touch Screen SCS/ZigBee radio control
Radio remote control
Light TV/SAT IPTV

actuator
IPTV
Shutter
n controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
actuator/
www irrigazione
control
Lights Shutters

GENERAL FEATURES
Control devices
Control devices allow you to control DEVICES TO BE COMPLETED
the state of the actuators, thus WITH KEY COVER FOR LIGHTS,
executing different functions: ON, SHUTTER AUTOMATION AND
OFF, Dimmer, UP/DOWN, timing, etc., SCENARIOS MANAGEMENT
which depend on the functioning These devices are completed with
mode that has been assigned to keys and key covers of two types:
them through an appropriate 1 function, one or two modules, to

configuration. be used with the gray control key;
All devices are equipped with a light 2 function, one or two modules, to

indicator that indicates the be used with the black control key.
load status (active or inactive) and
facilitates their detection in the dark.
The intensity of the signaling LEDs
can be adjusted/excluded.
Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED
Control key Control key Control key
Key cover Key cover Key cover Key cover

1 function 2 functions 1 function 2 functions
1 module 1 module 2 modules 2 modules
The control with the single key cover can become integrated The double key cover (tilting) can become integrated with a traditional exchanging contact.
with a traditional closing contact (pushbutton or switch). NOTE: control pushbuttons are supplied with the device as standard.

Some examples of control devices
complete with key covers.
Lights and shutters general control
Shutters control with 2 module key cover
Control for shutter and dimmer lights
SPECIFIC CONTROLS FOR

ADVANCED SHUTTER
MANAGEMENT
Using specific devices item H/
LN4660M2, item AM5860M2 with
actuator module DIN F401 and flush
mounted H/LN4661M2, AM5861M2,
it is possible to manage shutters
equipped with standard motor or
pulse motor, with advanced features.
In addition to the UP/DON
monostable and bistable operations,
with these devices it is possible
to save a specific shutter opening
position (Preset), stored in the
actuator, by simply pressing the
STOP pushbutton when the shutter
is still.
It is also possible to set a different
Preset
position as required by the user.

GENERAL FEATURES
Control devices for lights management

In addition to control devices with
customizable key covers it is possible
to choose control devices with
different operation modes.
2 module Soft Touch control
TOUCH CONTROLS WITH 2 OR 3

MODULES
This device is able to send actuation
and adjustment controls for lighting
(ON/OFF, Dimmer, timer etc.), sound
and video door entry functions
simply by touching the control
surface.
LIGHT AND
PRESENCE SENSORS (*)
Using brightness and movement/ Comfort and wellbeing

presence sensors, it is possible to The new sensors allow increasing
manage the lighting, in a MyHOME the level of comfort of the users,
system, depending on the presence with the automatic switching on of
of people and the amount of natural the light when entering the room,
light, respecting the requirements of and the preservation of the desired
the highest energy efficiency class for lighting level based on external
buildings, contemplated by European conditions.
Standard EN 15232.
This provides two advantages:
greater energy management

reducing energy waste through
an intelligent management of
the lights, ensuring the necessary
lighting levels, at the right time
and in the right place. The various
operating modes that can be set
with the configuration enable the IR movement sensor
user to obtain different levels of
energy efficiency.
NOTE (*): for the choice and installation of these products, see the specific chapter “General Passive infrared sensor for the detection of
rules for installation - brightness/movement/presence sensors” movement and the lighting level

Control devices for the management of lights
and automations (shutters, curtains, etc.)
MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL
8 KEYS
Equipped with 8 buttons with
backlit icons indicating the
respective assigned functions, this
particular control device is capable
of controlling lighting functions, 8-key control
shutters automation, sound system,
scenarios and video door entry
functions.
Nighter 3 module control CONTROLS WITH CAPACITIVE

SENSORS
Devices with buttons made of
capacitive sensors.
Each zone corresponding to a
Whice 4 module control key is marked in the middle by an
illuminated LED that increases in
intensity when the user puts his
finger to activate the control.
From the point of view of the
manageable functions, this control
is comparable to the control device
with the capacitive sensors described
above. It is produced in versions with
3 and 4 flush mounted modules,
respectively with 6 and 8 keys.
INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL

AND RECEIVER
The receiver allows to add or replace
IR receiver
to the manual control,
the remote control via the infrared
remote control.
It is possible to associate to the
remote control buttons, the controls
for actuators related to lighting and IR remote control
automation of shutters, curtains,

etc. It is also possible to manage
scenarios and operate on the sound
and video door entry systems.

GENERAL FEATURES
Control devices - scenarios

SHUTTERS
The control devices described in the activations which constitute the The devices mentioned are the
preceding pages can be configured environmental situation of comfort to following:
to activate, for example with the replicate. Scenario module F420 with two

push of a button, several users A scenario example is switching on DIN modules for saving up to 16
simultaneously. some lights to a certain intensity scenarios.
This feature, called "scenario" is level, and positioning some shutters MH202 scenario programmer for

carried out in conjunction with the for watching the television or reading the creation and management of
use of special devices capable of a book, following the lifestyle of the advanced scenarios, also linked
saving or programming all individual user. to time events, system status, and
more.
MyHOME_Screen 10
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto
MH202 scenario programmer
Lighting/movement sensor
TV/SAT
MyHOME_Screen 3.5
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo
Nighter & Whice control

In addition to the lights and shutter
features, both devices can manage
sound system, temperature control
and video entry system applications.
TV/SAT IPTV Special control

8-key control
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc w
Video Display
Scenario module F420
Soft Touch control
IPTV
Local display
Protected scenario control with transponder (*)

controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Scenario control
NOTE (*): at the moment these devices cannot activate scenarios managed by the MH202 scenario programmer.

GENERAL FEATURES
Control devices: table for selection
CONTROL SELECTION BASED ON THE FUNCTION TO BE MANAGED

BASIC CONTROL SPECIAL CONTROL SOFT TOUCH 8-KEY REMOTE CONTROL
CONTROL CONTROL
HD4653M2/3 H/LN4652
H4652/2 H4651M2
FUNCTIONS PERFORMED HC4653/2/3
L4652/2 L4651M2
HS4653/2/3
AM5832/2 AM5831M2 3529
H4652/3 HD4654
L4652/3 HC4654
AM5832/3 HS4654
L/N/NT4654N
88232
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON/OF control with light

intensity adjustment
LIGHTING
General room and group
controls
Timed controls
Shutter control
UP/DOWN in normal mode
AUTOMATION UP/DOWN in safe mode
controls
Recalling of scenarios
saved in the F420 scenario
module
SCENARIO
MANAGEMENT Activation of scenarios
saved in the MH200N
scenario programmer (CEN
configurator)

BRIGHTNESS AND BADGE-HOLDER TRANSPONDER CAPACITIVE NIGHTER SCENARIO CONTROL
MOVEMENT/PRESENCE POCKET READER AND WHICE CONTROL
SENSOR
HC/HD/HS4658 H4648 HD4607 HD4680

HC/HD/HS4659 H4649 HC4607 HC4680
HS4607 HD4657M3/4 HS4680
L/N/NT4658 LN4648
L/N/NT4607 HC4657M3/4 L4680
L/N/NT4659 LN4649 HS4657M3/4 N4680
BMSE3001
BMSE3003 NT4680
048834

GENERAL FEATURES
Actuator devices
GENERAL INFORMATION the removable terminals, they must characteristics they can be divided
These devices execute direct controls be connected to the 230 Vac load into:
and control the connected load in the power supply line. actuators with two flush-mounted

same way as an electromechanical There are different types of actuators modules to be completed with key
relay. that differ by type of load, controlled covers;
For this reason, in addition to being power and shape. Basic modular actuators

connected to the BUS cable through Based on the installation characterized by extremely
compact dimensions: width = 40.5
mm, height = 40.5 mm, depth = 18
Upper pushbutton
mm for junction boxes and socket
Lower pushbutton
boxes;
LED DIN module actuators for

switchboards.
Control key
Control key
Key cover Key cover

1 function 2 functions
2 modules 2 modules
Light Remote actuator "control"
management key cover
“actuator” key
cover
Example of installation DIN Actuator

in flush mounted boxes for installation in switchboards
Side-by-side Basic Actuators

Box Load
connection
terminals
Load control
pushbutton
Configurator housing
Input for
traditional
BUS BUS devices Support

Actuator devices - lighting control
The range of actuators in the powered with ferromagnetic or

MyHome catalog allows electronic transformers;
to meet any design requirement. ballast 1to10V DALI.

Regardless of the construction shape
and installation features, item dimmer F418
it is possible to choose devices for
switching on in ON/OFF mode or
gradually (dimmed) lights with power
from 40 to 2300 W of these type:
ON/OFF actuator Basic module
LED;
item 3475
fluorescent;

halogen;

incandescent;

ON/OFF ACTUATORS AND

DIMMER WITH POWER LINE
SUPPLY The catalog includes:
These devices, thanks to the line
power supply, can control the load ON/OFF actuators in versions
management of the new energy-
even in the absence of voltage from with 2, 4 and 8 relays with 16A saving lamps, such as compact
the BUS using the buttons on the contacts and independent fluorescent lamps and LED lamps;
device itself. outputs and characterized by the dimmers with 1/10V output for

In addition, by absorbing very low "zero crossing" power supply; electronic ballasts or driver power
current from the BUS, it is possible to particularly suitable for the supplies with power up to 1000VA.
use several actuators in the system
without considerably affecting the item BMDI1001
maximum number of devices which

item BMSW1001
can be installed in the system.
item BMSW1003

GENERAL FEATURES
Actuator devices - lighting control

“universal” dimmer with 1 and

2 outputs for the control of LED
lamps, CFL and any other type of
load with powers up to 300W.
L
N
item F418U2
T1,6H 250V
ID
230V
C16
Electrical connection of the Dimmer item

F418 to the electric power line and to the
load to be controlled
item F417U2
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
ACTUATORS Flush mounted actuator: DIN Actuators:
Some devices of the Energy Designed to be installed in flush Two actuator devices with NO relay
Management range are suitable mounted supports of the domestic capable of performing both ener-
also for controlling light points with line, this device has equivalent gy management and automation
maximum absorption of 16A. performance to the actuator item functions; one in the basic version
F523 but is not equipped with "zero item F523 and one fitted with an
The range consists of: crossing power supply" function. integrated current sensor item F5222
for the controlled load consumption
measurement (instantaneous con-
sumption and 2 energy totalizers that
can be reset independently).
Flush mounted actuator
Axolute series Configured in automation mode,
(the relay sets in the NC status) they
enable performing all the operations
available on the Control devices, with
the exception of the management of
the shutters.
Thanks to load power supply in "zero
crossing" mode these devices are
compatible with the new energy-sav-
Actuator
item F522 ing lamps (Compact Fluorescent and
LED).

Actuator devices for shutters, curtains automation
The control of shutter and/or curtain 2 and 4-relay actuators provided

motors can be made using: for ON/OFF control of the lighting
and specially configured in
"interlock" mode for operation in
pairs of the relays.
N
L1
M L2
L
Actuator F411U2 M = AC motor

with 2 windings
L1-N = clockwise rotation
L2-N = counterclockwise rotation
2 Relay actuator item 4 Relay actuator item

F411U2 F411/4
Connection of the 2-relay actuator item F411U2 for

the control of a curtain with electric motor 230V ac
actuator with 2 interlocked

Preset function:
relays for the control of standard In addition to the Monostable and
motors with automatic calibration, Bistable UP/DOWN operating modes,
standard motors with manual by pressing the STOP pushbutton
calibration and pulse motors. the control gives the possibility of
Used together with specific control moving the shutter to a specific
Flush mounted UP pushbutton
devices for the management of position (Preset) saved by the actuator
shutters, the device gives the actuator. During this mode of
possibility of performing advanced operation, the Preset LED will be on.
functions, like the management The actuator is supplied with 9 preset
of 100 different positions, the positions, selectable by configuration;
management of the 3rd limit in addition to these, according to the
switch (blade position adjustment), user's requirements, it is however
and saving a shutter position possible to set a new position
(Preset). through configuration. The Preset
If used with other generic control function can be managed even with STOP
BUTTON DOWN pushbutton
devices, it only performs the the Scenario module. The actuator is
basic functions (UP and DOWN). also available in DIN modular version.
Available in flush mounted version
to be completed with key covers
and 2-module DIN modularity.

GENERAL FEATURES
Actuator devices: actuators selection

The table allows identification of the actuator device depending on what it is to be used for, the electrical features of the load
to be controlled and the installation features.
Warning: Unless otherwise specified in the instruction leaflet, a 10 A thermal magnetic protection must be fitted on the power line to the actuators.
CONTROLLABLE LOADS (230 Va.c. 50/60 Hz)

Actuators Type
Incandescent and halogen LED lamps Linear fluorescent lamps 1) Compact fluorescent lamps Electronic 3) Ferromagnetic transform- Motor reducers for
lamps transformers ers 2) 3) shutters 4)
energy saving
H/L4671M2 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
AM5851M2 460 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W 460 VA 460 W
H/L4671/1 6A 150 W 0.65 A 150 W 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

AM5851/1 1380 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W 460 VA -
H/L4678 0.25 - 1.30 A - - - - 0.25 - 1.30 A -

60 - 300 W - - - - 60 - 300 VA -
3475 2A 40 W - 40 W - 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

3476 460 W Max 1 lamp - Max 1 lamp - 460 VA -
H/L4661M2 - - - - - - 2 A 250 Va.c.

AM5861M2
F401
F411U1 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
2300 W Max. 10 lamps 920 W Max. 10 lamps 920 W 920 VA -
F411U2 10 A 250 W 4A 250 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 2A

1380 W Max. 4 lamps 230 W Max. 4 lamps 230 W 460 VA 460 W
F411/4 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A

F411/1NC 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -

BMSW1002 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -

3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1003 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -

3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1005 16 A 2.1 A 4.3 A 5A 16 A 16 A -

3680 W 500 VA 10X2X36 W 1150 VA 3680 W 3680 W -
Notes:
1) Power factor corrected fluorescent lamps, energy saving lamps, discharge lamps.
2) In order to calculated the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a dimmer
to a 100 VA ferromagnetic transformer with 0.8 performance, the actual load power will be 125 VA.
3) The transformer must be loaded at its rated power, or in any case never below 90% of its rated power. It will be preferable to use a single transformer, rather than several transformers in
parallel.
For example, it will be preferable to use one single 250 VA transformer with 5 x 50 W spotlights connected, rather than using 5 x 50 VA transformers in parallel, with one 50 W spotlight each.
4) The symbol shown on the actuators refers to the shutter motor reducers.

CONTROLLABLE LOADS (230 V A.C. 50/60 HZ)
Actuators Type
Energy saving LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic Ferromagnetic trans- Motor reducers for
incandescent and halogen lamps 1) lamps transformers3) formers 2) 3) shutters 4)
lamps
BMDI1001 4.3 A - 4.3 A 4.3 A - - -
1000 VA - 1000 VA 1000 VA - - -
BMDI1002 Dimmer for ballast - 4 4.3 A outputs
4x 1000VA@ 230 Vac
4x500VA@ 230 Vac
F413N - - 2 A 460 W 5) - - - -
- - Max. 10 ballast type T5, - - - -
T8, compact or driver
for LED
F414 0.25 - 4.3 A - - - - 0.25 - 4.3 A -

60 - 1000 VA - - - - 60 - 1000 VA -
F416U1 4.3 A - - - 4.3 A 4.3 A -

40 - 1000 W - - - 40 - 1000 W 40 - 1000 W -
F417U2 1.7 A - - - 1.7 A 1.7 A -

40 - 400 W - - - 40 - 400 W 40 - 400 W -
F418 1÷300 W 1÷300 VA - 1÷300 VA 1÷300 VA - -
F418U2 2x300 W 2x300 VA - 2x300 VA 2x300 VA 2x300 VA -
F429 SCS/DALI dimmer interface - 8 x16 ballast
Notes:
2) In order to calculated the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a dimmer
to a 100 VA ferromagnetic transformer with 0.8 performance, the actual load power will be 125 VA.
3) The transformer must be loaded at its rated power, or in any case never below 90% of its rated power. It will be preferable to use a single transformer, rather than several transformers in
parallel.
For example, it will be preferable to use one single 250 VA transformer with 5 x 50 W spotlights connected, rather than using 5 x 50 VA transformers in parallel, with one 50 W spotlight each.
5) Only compatible with lamps with 1/10 V Ballast.

GENERAL FEATURES
Interfaces
With these devices it is possible Basic module characterized

to connect to the BUS traditional by reduced dimensions for
equipment such as switches and installation behind the traditional
buttons expanding the use of the sockets (e.g.switch, button) or low
BUS to already existing traditional electronic sockets (e.g.: controls,
systems. sensors) present in a 503E box.
It is also possible to interface This installation solution simplifies
thermostats, control devices, the conversion of traditional
humidity sensors, wind detectors, electric systems into home
etc.. automation systems, as it makes it
Available in two versions: possible to keep the existing flush
DIN module for installation in
mounted boxes, without the need
switchboards; for masonry work.
Contact interface
in DIN module
Contact interface
in DIN module
External devices Prestige switch (reuse

of historical devices)

BUS system extension with ZigBee radio devices
The system described in the previous This solution can also be extended POSSIBLE FUNCTIONS
pages can be expanded at any time with some advantages, to new Shutter and rolling shutter

by extending the wiring and adding buildings. automation;
new devices. For example in offices with moving Lighting;

Not always, however this operation walls and with false ceiling mounted Scenario management.

is easy to carry out; often in BUS actuators, the radio controls are
environments such as buildings with the used as flexible light points, easy
historic and/or architectural value it is to reposition in case of modification
necessary to intervene heavily on the in the arrangement of the offices, or
wall structure. the furniture.
These problems can be easily solved For more information and choice
using radio controls of the Home of control devices see the specific
connected - lights and automations technical documentation "Home
offer, battery-powered and connected - lights and automations"
independent of the system wiring.
The integration between the two
technologies, one radio and one BUS,
is carried out by a particular interface.
Radio control for

the management
Light Shutter of lights
switch control
Power supply
Radio interface
TV/SAT
TV/SAT IPTV
IPTV
230 Vac
Light Shutter
actuator actuator
TV/SAT
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione
automazione
diffusione sonora
diffusione sonora
antifurto
antifurto
termoregolazione
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
videocitofonia
controllo
controllo
lan
lan
controllo carichi
controllo carichi
energia
energia
luci
luci
tvcc
tvcc
www
www
irrigazione
irrigazione
IPTV
termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Remote control for the

management of scenarios
Lights Shutters

CONFIGURATION
General concepts
This chapter describes the general ACTUATOR ADDRESS -
concepts for the “physical” and PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
“virtual” configuration of the The address of each actuator is in the housing identified with G
MyHOME automation devices. For defined uniquely by assigning the (Group).
detailed information about the numeric configurators 1 to 9 in Some actuators have several G
configuration of each device see the positions A (Room) and PL (Light positions (G1, G2 and G3) as they can
corresponding "technical sheet". Point inside the Room). These belong to several different groups at
values must correspond to those in the same time.
ACTUATORS: positions A and PL of the respective
ADDRESS AND TYPE OF control device. Example: The actuator configured with A = 1,
CONTROL A maximum of 9 addresses can be PL = 3 and G = 4 is device 3 of room 1 belonging to
To understand the addressing logical defined for each room; a maximum of group 4.
it is useful to define some terms 9 rooms can be defined in a system.
which will occur frequently in this The group of belonging is defined by
guide. inserting a third numeric configurator
Room (A)
Set of devices belonging to a logical Physical configuration
area (in a home, for example, the
living room, the bedroom, etc.). ROOM 9
Light Point (PL) A =9 A =9 A =9 A =9
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 2 PL = 9
Numeric identification of the single
actuators inside the Room. A =9 A =9 A =9
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 9
Group (G)
Set of devices also belonging to
different rooms but which must be ROOM...
controlled at the same time (e.g. the ROOM 2
rolling shutters of the North side of 1–9
ROOM 1
the home, the lighting of the day
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =1
PL = 2 PL = 9
area, etc.). PL = 1 PL = 1
A =1 A =1 A =0
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 9
GROUP 9
1–9
GROUP 1
A = GR
PL = 1
1–9

ACTUATOR ADDRESS - VIRTUAL LOGICAL EXTENSION
CONFIGURATION In case of exceeding the
Using the MyHOME Suite application configuration limits mentioned
it will be possible to define a (system with many devices), it is
maximum of 16 addresses for each possible to an extended system
room (PL=0-15); a maximum of 11 consisting of more extended systems
rooms can be defined in a system. connected to each other through the
(A=0 -10). appropriate interface item F422 in
"logical expansion" (see the General
Rules for Installation section).
Virtual configuration
ROOM 10
A = 10 A = 10 A = 10 A = 10
PL = 0 PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 15
A = 10 A = 10 A = 10
PL = 0 PL = 1 PL = 15
ROOM...
ROOM 1
0 – 15
ROOM 0
A =0 A =0 A =0 A =0
PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 15
A =0 A =0 A =0
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 15
GROUP 255
1 – 15
GROUP 1
A = GR
PL = 1
1 – 255

CONFIGURATION
General concepts
CONTROLS: ADDRESS AND TYPE

OF CONTROL
The control devices also have configurators with graphics which
positions A and PL to define the enable the device to send the control
addresses of the devices which with the various ways listed in the
receive the control (actuators). table below.
For these positions there are numeric
Mode for addressing the devices using the Physical Configuration Mode for addressing the devices using the Virtual Configuration
TYPE OF CONTROL CONTROL DEVICE TYPE OF CONTROL CONTROL DEVICE

value of the Configurable address Configuration
configurator socket
configurator
A 0-10
Point-to-point
A 1-9 PL 0-15
Point-to-point
PL 1-9
A AMB
Room
A AMB PL 0-10
Room
PL 1-9
A GR
Group
A GR PL 1-255
Group
PL 1-9
A GEN
General
A GEN PL -
General
PL -

Examples of configuration
EXAMPLES OF CONFIGURATION
Point-to-point control Group control
If the No. 3 control is configured with If the No. 7 control is configured identified with G = 1 (thus belonging
A = 2 and PL = 3, this device sends with A = GR and PL = 1, this device to group 1).
the control to the actuator identified sends the control to the actuator
with A = 2 and PL = 3.
POINT-TO-POINT ROOM GROUP GENERAL

CONTROLS CONTROLS CONTROLS CONTROLS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = AMB A = AMB A = GR A = GR
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 1 PL = 2
A = GEN
PL = –
BUS
actuators A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
G = 1 G = 1 G = 2 G = 2 G = 1 G = 1
= Point-to-point control 1 2 3 4 5 6
= Group control

CONFIGURATION
Maximum number of devices which can be configured

PHYSICALLY CONFIGURED
SINGLE SYSTEM
A single system can manage up to 9 to manage up to 9 light points (PL), one or more groups must be added.
rooms (A). for a total of 81 addresses. It is also possible to have several
For each room, it will then be possible To these addresses, any inclusion in devices with the same address.
Basic contact Shutter Dimmer

interface control control
81 ADDRESSES MAX.
A
ON ON
3 31
PL1
power supply
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
OFF OFF
PL1 PL2 C
230 Vac BUS cable
L
Dimmer
DIN mod.
T5H 250V
A
Basic actuator flush mounted 0245 06
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
actuator
SPE
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ¤
A PL M G
PL1 PL2 C
VIRTUALLY CONFIGURED
SINGLE SYSTEM
A single system can manage up to 11 For each room it will then be possible 15), for a total of 175 addresses (the
rooms (A=0-10). to manage up to 16 light points (PL=0- address A=0, PL=0 is not permitted).
Basic contact Shutter Dimmer 230 Vac

175 ADDRESSES MAX.
interface control control Web server

A
ON ON Additional
3 31
PL1
power supply
PL2
power supply
M
SPE
ART. 3477
PRI: 220 – 240 V~

175 – 165 mA
OFF OFF 47/63 Hz
PL1 PL2 C
F453
1 2 1 SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
Crossover Ethernet
230 Vac
cable BUS cable
Dimmer PC
DIN mod.
L
T5H 250V
Basic actuator Flush mounted

0245 06
A
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
actuator
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ¤
A PL M G
PL1 PL2 C

Logical expansion of the addresses
VIRTUALLY CONFIGURED
EXTENDED SYSTEM WITH ONE
F422 INTERFACE
In larger homes, or in the service interface F422 configured in the “logic
sector, there might be the need for expansion” mode: with configurators
Automation systems with a higher N° 2 in position M and N° 1 in I4.
number of functions than the above.
In this case, it is possible to create an
extended Automation system using
MAX 175 ADDRESSES
Basic contact shutter dimmer fan shutter

power supply interface control control control control
A
ON ON ON
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
OFF OFF OFF

PL1 PL2 C
230 Vac
L
actuator
DIN mod. 1
1 2
2
3
3 L N
T5H 250V
0245 06 AR T.F470/2
SOUND
A A
3 31
3 31
PL1 PL1
PL2 PL2
M M
SPE SPE
SYSTEM N° 2
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ¤
ART. 3477
A PL M G
Interface
(Local BUS)
349 ADDRESSES MAX.

F422
PL1 PL2 C PL1 PL2 C
basic actuator flush mounted dimmer basic actuator OUT

I1 =–
actuator DIN mod. I2 =–
OUT
AR T.F422
I3 =–
Basic contact shutter dimmer fan shutter I4 =1
MAX 174 ADDRESSES
interface control control control control M =2 IN

power supply
A
ON ON ON
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
OFF OFF OFF

PL1 PL2 C
230 Vac
L
actuator
DIN mod.
1 2 3 L N
1 2 3
T5H 250V
0245 06 AR T.F470/2
A A
3 31
3 31
PL1 PL1
AUTOMATION
PL2 PL2
M M
SPE SPE
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ¤
ART. 3477
SYSTEM N° 1 A PL M G
PL1 PL2 C PL1 PL2 C
(Main riser)
basic actuator flush mounted dimmer basic actuator
actuator DIN mod.
PC 230 Vac Additional

Web server power supply
ETHERNET
PRI: 220 – 240 V~

175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS AI SCS AV
Crossover type Ethernet cable

CONFIGURATION
Logical expansion of the addresses

VIRTUALLY CONFIGURED Touch screen and Energy Management Control
EXTENDED SYSTEM WITH Unit, these devices will have to be installed in the
SEVERAL F422 INTERFACES main riser.
If three or more systems (up to a
maximum of 9) must be combined,
these must be connected by means
of interfaces F422 with a common
MAIN RISER
bus, which from now on we will call 166 ADDRESSES MAX.
“riser”, on which the control, activation LOCAL BUS
and management (for example MAX 174 ADDRESSES Automation system No. 1
Touch Screen) devices can also be I1 = – OUT

I2 = –
installed because they belong to I3 = –
OUT
ART.F422
I4 = 1 Interface
the Automation system. The riser M= 2
F422
cannot be made, for example, with
IN
a Burglar-alarm or 2 wire Video door
entry system. The F422 interfaces
are configured for operation in LOCAL BUS
MAX 174 ADDRESSES
“logic expansion” mode, connecting Automation system No. 2
configurator no. 2 to the M position I1 = – OUT
MAX ADDRESSES: 174x9+166 (MAIN RISER) = 1732

I2 = –
and configuring the address of I3 = –
OUT
Interface
ART.F422
I4 = 2
position I4 with configurators from M = 2 F422
1 to 9, as per the following diagram.
IN
For each of the 9 systems there will be
174 configuration addresses available,
LOCAL BUS
excluding the interface address, as
Automation system No. 3
MAX 174 ADDRESSES
well as 166 addresses on the riser, for a

total of 1732 addresses. I1 = – OUT
I2 = –
OUT
I3 = –
Interface
ART.F422
I4 = 3
Warnings: M = 2 F422
In the main riser it is possible to install control

IN
devices configured to send GROUP or GENERAL
controls to some or all of the actuators situated in
LOCAL BUS
the single systems and in the same main riser.
MAX 174 ADDRESSES
POINT-POINT controls generated inside each

I1 = – OUT
single system and on the main riser can reach I2 = – OUT
I3 = –
the actuators situated in the whole system only I4 = 4
ART.F422
Interface
if they are sent from the appropriately configured
M = 2 F422
SPECIAL control device H/L4651M2, AM5831M2 IN

situated on the main riser or on one of the single
systems (max 9) connected.
If you need to control and execute the centralized

management of the system with Web Server,

EXTENDED SYSTEM WITH
INTERFACE F422 AND WEB SERVER
Special systems for which the and a LAN network which forms the or more systems for each of which a
availability of more than 1739 connection infrastructure. Referring maximum of 1739 addresses can be
addresses is required can be made to the picture below, in this case the configured. The centralized control
using one or more Web Servers F454 extended system is made up of two of the functions is obtained through
Personal Computer, connecting
directly to the Web Server fixed IP
LOCAL BUS
address and working on Web pages
Automation system No. 1 Main
OUT riser with preconfigured icons.
MAX 1739 ADDRESSES
OUT
Control ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
LOCAL BUS
OUT
OUT
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
ART.F422
Interface
C1 C2 F422
IN Web Server
ETHERNET
F454
SYSTEM 1
SCS AI SCS AV
BUS
PC
LOCAL BUS
OUT riser
MAX 1739 ADDRESSES
OUT
Control ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
LOCAL BUS
OUT
OUT
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
ART.F422
Interface
C1 C2 F422
IN
Web Server
ETHERNET
F454
SYSTEM 2
LAN
SCS AI SCS AV
LAN
BUS
LOCAL BUS
OUT riser
MAX 1739 ADDRESSES
OUT
Control ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
LOCAL BUS
OUT
OUT
1 2 3 4
ART.F422
Interface ETHERNET
Web Server
F422
ART. F411/2
C1 C2
F454
IN
SCS AI SCS AV
SYSTEM 3 BUS

CONFIGURATION
Addressing levels
For a better understanding of the Example: control for a single load (lamp, fan, rolling shutter, etc.)
concepts described in the previous
ROOM 1 ROOM 2
page, the four addressing modes are
described below. The control devices
(senders) can activate the actuators
(receivers) with the following modes:
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
POINT-TO-POINT CONTROL
Direct control to one actuator
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV
identified by a “room number” and a

automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione
automazione
“light point number”.
diffusione
videocitofonia
sonora controllo
antifurto automazione
termoregolazione
lan diffusione
controllo
videocitofonia
carichi
sonora antifurto
energia
controllo termoregolazione
luci
lan videocitofonia
controllo
tvcccarichi controllo
energia
www irrigazione
lan
automazione
luci controllo
diffusione
tvcc
carichi sonora energia
www
antifurto irrigazione
termoregolazione
luci
automazione diffusione
videocitofonia
tvcc sonora www
controllo
antifurto irrigazione
termoregolazione
lan controllo
videocitofonia
carichi energia
controllo luci
lan controllo
tvcccarichi energia
www irrigazione
luci tvcc www irrigazione
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
Control device: A = n* PL = n*
Actuator: A = n* PL = n*
ROOM CONTROL
Direct control to all the actuators Example: control for all the lamps of a room
identified by the same room number.
ROOM 1 ROOM 2
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = AMB A = AMB
PL = 1 PL = 2
Control device: A = AMB PL = n*

n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9 Actuator: A = n* PL = n*

GROUP CONTROL
Direct control to all the actuators
which perform particular functions
even if they belong to different
rooms and are identified by the same
“group number”.
Example: control of all the lamps of a floor, on the North side of the building
ROOM 1 ROOM 2
A = GR
PL = 1
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = GR
PL = 2
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 A =2 A =2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
G =1 G =1 G =2 G =2 G =1 G =1
A = AMB A = AMB
PL = 1 PL = 2
Control device: A = GR PL = n*
Actuator: A = n* PL = n* G = n*

CONFIGURATION
Addressing levels
GENERAL CONTROL
Direct control to all the system
actuators.
Example: control of all the lamps of the building
ROOM 1 ROOM 2
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = GR
PL = 1
A = GR A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 A =2 A =2
PL = 2 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
G =1 G =1 G =2 G =2 G =1 G =1
A = GEN
PL = -
A = AMB A = AMB
PL = 1 PL = 2
Control device: A = GEN PL = /

Actuator: A = n* PL = n* G = n* n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9

Main operating modes
The devices in the automation system device must do, is defined by putting The table below lists the various
can perform different functions, such configurators into the housings operating modes as a function of the
as setting the brightness, switching marked with M of the control devices configurator and type of key cover
lamps on/off or opening/closing and completing the devices with keys used in the device.
rolling shutters. and key covers (if the devices are flush
The function performed, i.e. what the mounted).
CONTROL TABLE
Key covers Configurator value (M) Function performed
1 FUNCTION
Cyclical ON-OFF control
M
M
M M
Repeatedly pressing the relay actuators device key cover, ON and OFF controls will be sent
M M
in a cyclical way.
M With dimmer actuators, keepMthe pushbutton pressed to adjust the load power.
M
M M M
no configurator
M 1√ M 1√
M ON
M
SPE
ON
1√ M ON1√control M
SPE
1√
1√
M
M
When
1√
pressing the MMcorresponding
1√
Mkey cover, the device sends the ON control.
M ON
SPE 1√
M 1√ M 1√
M ON
SPE 1√
M
M OFF configurator ON 1√ M
M OFF 1√
M 1√ M 1√
M ON OFF control M
SPE 1√
M OFF 1√
When pressing the corresponding
M key cover, the device sends the OFF control.
M OFF 1√
M SLA
M O/I M SLA
configurator OFF
M O/I
M
M SLA
M OFF 1√
M O/I
M
M O/I
Monostable ON-OFF controlS L(pushbutton)
A
This mode can perform an ON/OFF control similar to the control of a traditional point-
M P L
point pushbutton, thus
M
intended
P L
just for one address.
M
M M SLA
M P L
M
configurator
M
PUL O/I
M P L
M
2 FUNCTION
M Bistable control
M with hold (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)
M
M
Pressing the key cover (lower or upper) sends the UP-DOWN control to the rolling shutter
P L
M
motor.
After the control has been sent, press the lower or upper key cover again, to stop the
rolling shutter in the required position.
M 1√ M 1√
configurator
M ON
SPE 1√
Monostable control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)

M M M
The device sends an UP-DOWN control for a rolling shutter motor as long as the lower or
upper key cover is pressed.
M OFF When the keyM cover is released, the motor STOPS.
1√
configurator M
M 1√ M 1√
M ON
SPE 1√
ON/OFF control
M
Used with relay actuators, when the upper key cover is pressed the device sends an ON
SLA
M O/I
control; when the lower key cover is pressed the device sends an OFF control.
With dimmer actuators, pressing the upper and lower key cover adjusts the load power.
M
M OFF 1√
configurator O/I M P L
M SLA
M O/I
CONFIGURATION
Main operating modes

CEN OPERATING MODE position. control, using the T1 (upper) and
This particular mode is used to The key (upper or lower) of the T2 (lower) pushbuttons. For the
manage scenario programmer control device and the scenario to correspondence between the control
devices MH200N. As described in be activated are linked through the keys and the scenarios to activate see
the pages of this guide, the device TiMH200 program written to create the table:
can manage even complex scenarios the scenarios and then saving them
activated automatically after events in the MH200N device.
in the system or manually by pressing For example, it is possible to activate
a key of a control device configured two independent scenarios using
with the CEN configurator in the M the special H/L4651M2, AM5831M2
Type of control Configuration Identification of scenario activation keys

Special control A=0–9; PL=0–9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=0; LIV2=0; SPE=0; I=0 T1
H/L4651M2 and AM5831M2
T2
Basic control for 2 independent loads A1=0–9; PL1=0–9; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=0 T1
H/L4652/2 and AM5832/2
T2
A1=0–9; PL1=0–9; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=CEN T1 T2
T3 T4
Basic control for 3 independent loads A1=0–9; PL1=0–9; A2=0; PL2=0; A3=0; PL3=0; M=CEN T1 T2 T3
H/L4652/3 and AM5832/3
T4 T5 T6
M M
M M
MAIN ACTUATOR OPERATING MODES

The actuators can be configured for the following operating modes:
M M
M 1√ M 1√
M 1√
SPE
M
1√
1√
ACTUATORS TABLE
SPE
Configurator value (M)
1√
Function performed
M 1√ M 1√
Special functions
ON
M SPE 1√
This mode can perform special functions (OFF delayed, STOP timed) on the basis of the type of actuator used (single or
1√
M
1√
double) and the numeric configurator inserted.
configurator 1÷4
M Slave
OFF M SLA 1√
M SLA
This mode can perform a control with two or more actuators. In practice the actuators with the SLA (Slave) configurator
repeat the function performed by another actuator which acts as Master. The actuators must have the same addresses and
must be of the same type (either all light actuators or all rolling shutter actuators).
configurator SLA
M SLA
O/I
M P L
M P L
PUL
The device does not operate with the Room and General controls.
configurator PUL
M P L

Examples of configuration
The drawing shows a system for Group control from the configurators in position
the management of three lamps Group control 7 marked with A=GR M to define the function (ON/OFF or
and three shutters. Each actuator is and PL=1, controls actuators 1 and 2 ON/DOWN).
identified by three numbers: room marked with G=1
number (A), device progressive General control CONTROL OPERATING MODE
number (PL for light actuators and The devices identified A=GEN and The configurator inserted in position
PL1 and PL2 for shutter actuators) PL= - (no configurator) send a general M of each control device identifies
and Group (G) of belonging. control to all the actuators, for the the operating mode.
lights and for the shutters, in the The O/I configurator specifies a lamp
DEFINING THE ADDRESSES system. switching on control which is given
Point-to-point control by pressing the upper key cover (ON)
NOTE: The actuators which manage the shutters,
Control 1 (A = 1, PL = 1) controls and the lower key cover (OFF).
unlike those for the lights, are configured in the same
actuators 1 (A = 1, PL = 1 and G = 1).
way in the two positions PL1 and PL2.
In the same way control 2 (A = 1, PL The configurators and M in
= 2) controls actuator 2 (A = 1, PL = 2 The control devices are instead position M instead specify a control
and G = 1) etc. distinguished from the configurators to manage the rolling shutters
Room control in positions A and PL which specify intended for actuators 4, 5 and 6.
Room control 8 (A=AMB, PL=2) the addresses of the actuators
controls actuators 4 and 5 marked receiving the control (one only, a
with A=2 group or several room actuators) and
POINT-TO-POINT GROUP ROOM GENERAL

CONTROLS CONTROLS CONTROLS CONTROLS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 A =2 A =3 A = GR A = AMB A = GEN A = GEN

PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = – PL = –
M = O/I M = O/I M = O/I M = M M = M M = M M = O/I M = M M = O/I M = M
BUS
1 2 3 4 5 6
actuators A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 3
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 1
G = 1 G = 1 G = 2 G = 1 G = 2 G = 1

CONFIGURATION
Configuration by MyHOME Suite of scenarios stored

in the MH202 scenarios programmer and activated by
movement/presence sensors
Depending on the desired
application, it is possible to start the
scenarios based on the following
events:
Presence/Absence;

Movement.

Depending on the desired function, it
is necessary to configure the sensors
differently and to create different
types of scenario in the MH202
programmer editor.
Some examples are shown briefly
below.
MH202 scenario programmer
EXAMPLE 1 - SCENARIO BASED ON PRESENCE/ABSENCE

After an event of the presence/absence type, the sensor activates
a scenario, after which it will continue to manage the lights Sensor configuration
automatically.
A possible application is the following: when presence is detected
the sensor loads a scenario stored in the MH202 scenario
programmer in which a Fan coil is activated, while the sensor
switches on the lights at the same time; the lights are then
managed autonomously by the sensors.
Once the presence is no longer detected, the sensor loads a
programmed scenario in which the Fan coil is deactivated and,
after the delay configured on the sensor, the sensor switches off
the lights.
Configuration of objects for

the scenario programmer,
item HM202.

EXAMPLE 2 - SCENARIO BASED ON MOVEMENT
This type of scenario is activated whenever the sensor detects
a movement. In this case the sensor simply loads the scenario
stored in the MH202 programmer, but does not adjust the lights.
Example: timed lighting of stair lights after detecting movement.
Whenever the sensor detects a movement, it activates the
scenario stored in the MH202 scenario programmer.
Configuration of objects for the scenario programmer, item

Sensor configuration HM202.

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION
Maximum distances and absorptions

This chapter outlines the details for classification is only guaranteed For the calculations mentioned
ensuring a correct realization of a subject to full compliance with above, refer to the TECHNICAL DATA
MyHOME automation system: current installation regulations, and listed in the Technical sheets of
SELV Classification;
with the general rules for installation every device. When calculating the
Maximum distances and
for each single device and cable absorptions, it is also necessary to
absorptions; making up the system recommended consider the availability of current
Maximum number of devices
by BTicino. according to the length of the cable.
which can be configured When setting up, please observe the
MAXIMUM DISTANCES OF THE following rules:
SELV CLASSIFICATION BUS CABLE AND ABSORPTIONS
The automation system is SELV The maximum number of devices
(Safety Extra Low Voltage) classified that can be connected to the BUS
due to the fact that it is powered depends on their total absorption
using double safety insulation and on the distance between the 1 The length of the connection between the
independent devices, not connected connection point and the power power supply and the furthest device cannot
to the earth, and with maximum supply. The power supply unit can exceed 250 m.
operating voltage of 27 Vdc, non- deliver up to 1200 mA or 600 mA; 2 The total length of the connections
undulated, in accordance with CEI hence, the maximum number of must not exceed 500 m (extended cable).
EN 600065 comparable to a SELV devices will be determined by the 3 In order to ensure optimum distribution of the currents
source as described in point 411.125 sum of the absorptions of the single on the BUS line, it is recommended to position
of CEI 64-8-4. The conformity to SELV devices you need to install. the power supply in an intermediate position.
ON ON
OFF OFF
A PRI
A
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
B SCS B
E46ADCN
E49
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
With E46ADCN power supply: With E49 power supply:

A = 250 m max A = 250 m max
B = 250 m max B = 250 m max
A + B = 500 m A + B = 500 m
The maximum current The maximum current
supplied by the power supply supplied by the power supply
is: 1200 mA. is: 600 mA.
NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, distances must halved.

ABSORPTIONS, SIZE AND DISSIPATIONS
Item Description (power supply 27 Vdc) Size Dissipation
Dissipated power Max. load
with max. load
3475 actuator 13 mA Basic module
3476 control actuator 13 mA Basic module
3477 contact interface 3.5 mA Basic module
E46ADCN power supply 8 DIN modules 11 W 1.2 A
E49 compact power supply 2 DIN modules 5.3 W
F411U1 1-relay actuator 5 mA standby - max 30 mA 2 DIN modules 1.5 W
F412U1 2-relay actuator 55 mA (single loads) 2 DIN modules 1.7 W
30 mA (interlock)
F411/4 1) 4-relay actuator 60 mA (single loads) 2 DIN modules 2.4 W
22 mA (interlock)
F412 1) 1-relay NC/NA actuator 20 mA 2 DIN modules 1.5 W
F413N 1) output 1 to 10 for ballast 30 mA 2 DIN modules 0.5 W
F414 DIN dimmer 9 mA 4 DIN modules 11W 1000W
5W 500W
F522 Actuator 16A with current sensor 30 mA 1 DIN module
F418 DIN dimmer 10 mA 4 DIN modules 2.5 W 300 W
F523 16A actuator 10 mA 1 DIN module
F420 scenario module 20 mA 2 DIN modules 0.6 W
F422 SCS/SCS interface IN: 25 mA OUT: 2mA 2 DIN modules 1W
F425 memory module 5 mA 2 DIN modules 0.1 W
F426 SCS/EIB interface 30 mA 6 DIN modules
F427 OPEN KNX interface 6 DIN modules
F428 contact interface 9 mA 2 DIN modules 0.2 W
F429 SCS/DALI interface 5 mA 6 DIN modules
H/L4651M2 AM5831M2 special control 6 mA for H4651M2 2 flush-mounted modules
8.5 mA for L4651M2 and
AM5831M2
H/LN4652 8-key control 5 mA (stand-by) 20 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
H/L4652/2 AM5832/2 control for 2 actuators 9 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
H/L4652/3 AM5832/3 control for 3 actuators 9 mA 3 flush-mounted modules
H/L4671/1 AM5851/1 1-relay actuator 16.5 mA 2 flush-mounted modules 0.9 W
H/LN4671M2 AM5851M2 control/actuator 14 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
H/L4678 flush-mounting dimmer 9 mA 2 flush-mounted modules 3W 300 W
H/HW/AM4890 LN4890/A Color touch screen 80 mA 3+3 flush mounted modules
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB SB receiving radio interface 33 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607 protected control 15 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607/4 protected scenario control 12 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4610 fixed IR detector 4.5 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4611 swivel IR detector 4.5 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N 16 A flush mounted 2 module actuator 10 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4680 scenario control 9 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
BMSE3001 passive infrared ceiling sensor 12mA diameter 102mm - depth
55.6
BMSE3003 double-technology IR sensor 17mA diameter 120mm - depth 62.27
BMSW1005 actuator power supply 100-240Vdc 10 DIN modules 3600W
BMDI1002 1-10V Dimmer power supply 100-240Vdc 10 DIN modules 1000W
F418U2 DIN Dimmer - 2 outputs 18mA 4 DIN modules 2X300W
F416U1 dimmer actuator1000W TC 5 mA 6 DIN modules 8W 1000 W
F417U2 dimmer actuator1000W 2x400 W TC 5 mA 6 DIN modules 8W 2 X 400 W
BMDI1001 dimmer actuator1000W 1/10 V 5 mA 6 DIN modules
BMSW1002 2-relay 230 Vac actuator 5 mA 4 DIN modules 1.7 W
BMSW1003 4-relay 230 Vac actuator 5 mA 6 DIN modules 2.8 W
H/LN4660M2 AM5860M2 shutter control 7 mA
H/LN4661M2 AM5861M2 shutter actuator 16 mA 2A 250 Vac
F401
HD/HC/HS4657M3/M4 touch control 25 mA 2 flush-mounted modules
NOTE:
1) the dissipated power indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the relays loaded at the maximum load. With lower loads also the dissipated power is lower and may be
calculated by means of the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[I12+I22+...IN2]
P: dissipated power in mW, N: no. of loaded relays IN: load current corresponding to the N relay.
Install the items with greater dissipated power (in special power supplies and dimmers) in lower positions in the switchboard for easier heat dissipation.
Do not place devices which dissipate a power greater than 5W side by side, but leave an empty module between them.
Maximum distances and absorptions

For the power supply selection keep PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE on the input bus (IN), the addresses

in mind the following guidelines: if Limit systems shall be applied to of Automation devices No. 1 must
the absorption of the whole system each bus in terms of absorption and be between A=1 / PL=1 and A=2 /
is less than 600 mA, the E49 compact maximum wiring distance, as shown PL=6;
power supply can be used. If the in the previous page. Therefore, it on the output bus (OUT), the

absorption is between 600 and 1200 is not possible to supply a system addresses of Automation devices
mA, use the E46ADCN power supply. consisting of two or more buses with No. 2 must be between A=2 /
For extended systems with current only one power supply unit E46ADCN PL=8 to the address of the next
absorption over 1200 mA or 600 mA or E49, connected to each other by interface.
powered by power supplies E46ADCN interfaces configured in “physical When setting up the system,
and E49, it will be necessary to split expansion” mode even if the number keep in mind the following
the system into several lines, each and type of components connected following recommendations:
powered by its own power supply to the system do not exceed the set It is not possible to connect two

and connected to each other using maximum absorption (1200 mA). interfaces in parallel to the same
interface F422 configured in “Physical Positions I3 and I4 shall be configured BUS;
expansion” mode. according to the configuration of It is possible to use up to 4

the Automation devices in the two interfaces in series, which divide
systems connected to each other. the system into 5 separate
Referring to the illustration, supposing sections;
A/PL = 28 53 that for example I3=2, I4 = 7: The F420 scenario module, the

F425 memory module, and the
devices that can be configured
using the self-learning mode must
be installed on the bus section
corresponding to their own
System 1
230 Vac local address. For example if the
scenario module is configured
F422 F422 as A=0 (no configurator), PL=1, it
OUT
will have to be placed on section
OUT OUT
F422 F422
1 of the system. The energy
C C
management system central unit
I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = –
F421 and the control panel N4682
I2 = – IN IN
I3 = 2 I3 = 5 must be installed on the BUS with
I4 = 7 I4 = 4
MOD = 1 MOD = 1 the highest addresses (system no.
IN
3 in the example).
System 2 System 3
230 Vac 230 Vac
A/PL = 11 26 A/PL = 55 99

ACTUATORS CONNECTION TO
THE LUMINARIES Example of connection with F411/1N
In order to manage some types of N
loads correctly, it is necessary to L
observe the installation specifications

for all actuators used.
1 2 3
Fluorescent lamps: the length of

F411/1N 1 2 3 L N
the connecting cable between the MIN 3 m
C1
actuator and the load must not be

less than 3m. Do not connect more
than 15 actuators controlling this
type of lamp on the same line;
Metal halide and sodium

Warning: Refer to the technical data shown on the technical sheets for each actuator.
vapor lamps: in addition to
the indications given for the
fluorescent lamps, please pay
attention to the operating
instructions of these lamps (for
example, avoid switching on when
hot), do not connect dimmers to
the same line of these lamps, keep
the bus line and the power line of
these lamps separated from each
other (at least 1 meter);
Three-phase networks: when using

three-phase networks, check the
balance of the phases as well as
the quality of the network. Maximum distances for connecting the contact interface
Non-compliance of the above 50 m
regulations may affect proper

A
operation of the devices. PL1

PL2
M
SPE
CONTACT INTERFACE PL1 PL2 C
CONNECTION WITH
Protection
TRADITIONAL DEVICES switch
(reuse of historical
The connection between the
devices)
interface (basic or DIN module) and
BUS
the traditional type device must not
exceed 50 meters in length. Several
pushbuttons may be connected to
the interface inputs.

Brightness and movement/presence sensors

DEVICE SELECTION CRITERIA Specifically, the choice of the type of sensor can be summed up in four
The following pages provide fundamental steps:
information for the selection and
1 2
ANALYSIS OF THE ROOM CHOICE OF THE SENSOR
installation of brightness and
CHARACTERISTICS TECHNOLOGY
movement sensors which, though
designed for use in tertiary settings,
are also applied in a residential
setting, helping to make buildings
more energy-efficient.
The most critical steps in planning a
lighting system with the components
mentioned above, from the simplest
to the most complex, are those
concerned with the choice of the
most suitable type of sensor. What
3 4
SENSOR COVERAGE CHOICE OF THE OPERATING
technology to use, how many AREA MODE
sensors, where they are positioned,
the type of coverage, etc., have a
considerable influence on the good
operation of the entire system.
Once the sensor has been chosen, two further phases are
required to complete the setup:
5 6
INSTALLATION ADJUSTMENT OF THE OPERATING
PARAMETERS

1 ANALYSIS OF THE ROOM CHARACTERISTICS
The first phase consists of analyzing the

room characteristics for which various
items of information are necessary
concerning:
Intended use of the room;

Position of the walls, doors and

windows;
Shape and size of the room;

Presence of spaces with a supply of
Position of the output terminals of the

Main space of activity of the

natural light; heating and cooling system;
occupants;
Position of work spaces;
Characteristics of the light fixtures

Ceiling height and presence of a false

installed or to be installed.
ceiling; Position of shelves, cupboards and

voluminous furniture;
WARNING: Remember to inform the

occupants about the operation of the
sensors so that they can consciously
participate in sustainable development


2 CHOICE OF THE SENSOR TECHNOLOGY
The second phase concerns the choice of the most suitable technology and is fundamental for optimizing detection,
optimizing system operation, and avoiding malfunctions such as false detection or undesired switching off.
PIR: passive infrared US: ultrasounds
PIR (passive infrared) is a detection technology These sensors emit sound waves that cannot be perceived
based on pyroelectric sensors, which measure the by the human ear; they use a quartz crystal that oscillates at
temperature variations in the room. The sensors detect the a frequency of 40 kHz, with power <110 dB at a distance of
changes in temperature in their detecting area, defined 1.5 m. The waves are emitted within the range of coverage
by a curved and faceted lens from which numerous rays of the sensor, bouncing off objects, surfaces and people.
are emitted; as the distance from the sensor increases, When the waves return to the sensor, it measures their
the distance between the various rays increases, and frequency. The movement is detected by a slight change in
consequently the detecting sensitivity decreases. frequency (Doppler effect), which determines the detection
Control of presence. The ultrasound detector is able to "notice"

circuit Signal objects and surfaces, as long as the surfaces in an enclosed
Amplifier
area are sufficiently compact to allow the sound waves to
Fresnel Pyroelectric
lens detector bounce off. The ultrasounds have no effects on humans and
CdS cell animals.
Infrared (brightness sensor)
radiation
Transmitter
Movement causes
NOTE: The parameter measured by the sensor is temperature. the change of frequency
(Doppler effect)
Receiver
The sensor functions better, the more the room temperature is different
from the body temperature.
The best solution is to place the sensor perpendicular to people's trajectory.
Double technology (PIR + US)
ADVICE: use passive infrared sensors in passage areas or those with a non-
sedentary presence, without obstacles that can hinder detection. Double-technology sensors use PIR/US technologies
to guarantee maximum reliability and coverage, with
minimum optimization of the possibility of false detection.
NOTE: The parameter measured by the sensor is the refraction of the

ultrasound wave against an obstacle.
The best solution is to place the sensor parallel to people's trajectory.
ADVICE: use ultrasound sensors in work areas or those with a sedentary

presence; avoid non-enclosed areas or those with glass walls.
The following diagram can be used to determine which sensor technology is best suited to each application/room.
Is the area used only

occasionally?
Do the lights stay switched on
when the rooms are empty?
No
Sì
Are there any energy

Do you want to have
recommendations to No automatic controls?
be respected?
No
Sì Sì
Another control system
Is the ceiling height would be more appropriate
less than 4 m? No
Sì
Are there walls, equipment
or furniture in the area?
No
Are there walls, equipment
or furniture in the area? PIR
Sì
Sì No Is it a small area or a
specific area requiring Sì
detection?
PIR
No
Is it a small or
Is the area delimited? No well-defined area? Another control system
would be more appropriate
No
Sì
Sì
Are there air flows?
Is there an air conditioning
Dual technology system?
No Sì
Is it possible for the installer Is there a direct line

Is there moving mechanical to move the detector a of sight in all areas? Sì
equipment in the room? way from the air
conditioning vent? PIR
No
No Sì No Sì
Dual technology Another control system Dual technology Dual technology

would be more appropriate


3 SENSOR COVERAGE AREA
The third phase consists of choosing the type and number of sensors best suited to control requirements.
To do this it is necessary first of all to subdivide the room into control areas, that is areas within which the users operate and
which must be controlled by means of one or more sensors.
Three typical situations may be presented:
1 Small room with only one control

area: a single sensor is enough to
2 Large room with only one control
area: a single sensor is not enough
3 Room with several control
areas: or each control area it is
guarantee the correct coverage of to guarantee the correct coverage indispensable to have one or more
the area. of the area. The solution is to place sensors in parallel, following the
a sufficient number of sensors in logic indicated in the two previous
parallel so as to cover the whole points.
room uniformly.
Once the control area or areas have been defined, it is possible to choose the sensor best suited to the requirements.
The coverage area of a sensor depends on three factors:
1) Type of installation: wall, ceiling or flush fitted civil series;
2) Installation height;
3) Detecting sensitivity.
When these three factors vary, it is possible to adapt the coverage area of a sensor to the control area.
For further details on the coverage area of sensors and on detecting sensitivity, see the technical sheets of the specific
products.

4 CHOICE OF THE OPERATING MODE
The fourth phase consists of choosing the operating mode. This influences both the comfort of use and energy saving; it is
important to choose the one best suited to the reference area.
AUTO mode* WALKTHROUGH mode*
Activation and deactivation of the load are managed Walkthrough mode helps to achieve increased energy
completely automatically by the sensor, depending saving: if the sensor detects movement/presence for
on the detection of movement/presence and on the a time of less than 20 seconds, the device reduces the
lighting level measured in the room. delay to 3 minutes (on the other hand, if time is greater,
The sensor keeps the load active as long as movement/ the value remains unchanged).
presence is detected, otherwise, at the end of the set
delay, the load is deactivated.
NOTE: (AUTO mode does not require the installation of an additional

ECO mode*
command, however it is possible to add one to force switching on or off)
ADVICE: to maximize energy saving, use AUTO mode in areas of

passage or where there is non-sedentary presence
Activation of the load is manual and deactivation is
managed automatically by the sensor, depending on the
detection of movement/presence and on the lighting
level measured in the room.
Once it has been activated manually, the load remains
active as long as movement/presence is detected,
otherwise, at the end of the set delay, the load is
deactivated.
An option of ECO mode is the RETRIGGER* function (to
be activated in the sensor parameters), which consists of
temporary operation (30 seconds) in AUTO mode after
switching off for non-detection of movement/presence.
30 seconds after switching off, the sensor resumes
working in ECO mode and the load must be reactivated
manually.
NOTE: (ECO mode does not necessarily require the installation of an

additional command)
* For further information on the operating modes
or the different parameters available, refer to the ADVICE: to maximize energy saving, use ECO mode in work spaces
technical sheets of the products where there is sedentary presence


5 INSTALLATION
The sensors can be installed in different ways to adapt better to the control requirements and the configuration of the room.
FLUSH MOUNTED CEILING INSTALLATION SURFACE CEILING INSTALLATION
Flush mounted installation with springs, without flush All ceiling sensors can be installed on the surface using the box
mounting box and without cover (springs and cover are for ceiling installation ref. 048875 to be bought separately.
supplied in a kit).
WALL INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF FLUSH MOUNTED SENSORS
Flush mounted installation with springs, without flush

mounting box and with cover (springs and cover are
supplied in a kit).
The ceiling sensors can be flush mounted even on masonry

ceilings or on plasterboard ceilings, using the appropriate
flush mounting boxes ref. 502E, PB502 and 89358.

6 ADJUSTMENT OF THE OPERATING PARAMETERS
The sensor configuration parameters can be set and modified either with the MyHome_Suite software or with the configuration
remote controls.
ADJUSTMENT WITH THE CONFIGURATION REMOTE

CONTROL
Using the configuration remote controls it is possible to 4m
4m
access and modify a wide range of parameters (*). The
remote controls allow you to avoid having to use the
configuration software to change the settings, and allow +/- 15°
+/- 15°
you to save a typical configuration and repeat it on other
sensors.
* Consult the technical sheets of the sensors for details of the parameters available.
There are two types of configuration remote controls:

Basic item BMSO4003: allows you only to send

information to the sensors;
Advanced item BMSO4001: allows you to send and

receive information from the sensors.
The operating principle is the same and consists of

pointing the remote control directly towards the sensor,
choosing the desired value and sending the parameter to
the sensor.


BEHAVIOR OF SENSORS
The following table shows the behav- It is presumed that a person is pres-
ior of sensors in the case of AUTO or ent in a room where there is natural
WALKTHROUGH operating mode. light.
ACTION ON OFF ADJUSTMENT DIMMER ADJUSTMENT

The person enters the room and the lighting level is No action No action
sufficient
The person enters the room and the lighting level is Immediate activation of the loads Immediate activation of the loads at the level prior to
insufficient Activation of the adjustment function (only if activated switching off (if the previous level is insufficient, the loads
and available only for advanced sensors) are activated at 70% of their maximum power)
Activation of the adjustment function (only if activated and
available only for advanced sensors)
The person remains in the room, the sensor adjusts If the loads are inactive, they are activated immediately If the loads are inactive, they are activated immediately at
the loads, and the general lighting level decreases If the loads are already active, no action is taken the level prior to the last deactivation
If the loads are active, the level at which they are dimmed
is increased
The person remains in the room, the sensor adjusts If the lighting level exceeds the brightness threshold set If the lighting level exceeds the brightness threshold set
the loads, and the general lighting level increases on the sensor, the loads are deactivated after 10 minutes on the sensor, the level at which the loads are active is
If the lighting level does not exceed the brightness thresh- reduced gradually (1% per minute; if the difference is
old set on the sensor, no action is taken particularly great, this may take up to one hour)
The person remains in the room, the loads are active Switch-off control (OFF): immediate deactivation of all Switch-off control (OFF): immediate deactivation of all
and the manual control is pressed briefly loads loads
Switch-on control (ON): activation of the adjustment Switch-on control (ON): activation of the adjustment
algorithm algorithm
The person remains in the room, the loads are active The adjustment algorithm is stopped The adjustment algorithm is stopped
and the manual control is pressed and held down No effect on the loads Immediate increase or decrease of the load activation level
The person remains in the room, the loads are inac- Switch-off control (OFF): stopping of the adjustment Switch-off control (OFF): stopping of the adjustment
tive and the manual control is pressed briefly algorithm algorithm
Switch-on control (ON): activation of the loads and of the Switch-on control (ON): activation of the adjustment algo-
adjustment algorithm rithm and of the load levels prior to the last deactivation
The person remains in the room, the loads are The adjustment algorithm is deactivated The adjustment algorithm is deactivated
inactive and the manual control is pressed and held Immediate activation of the loads Activation of the loads and increase or decrease of the load
down activation level
The person leaves the room Deactivation of the loads and deactivation of the adjust- Deactivation of the loads and deactivation of the adjust-
ment algorithm at the end of the delay set on the sensor ment algorithm at the end of the delay set on the sensor
Interruption of the main power supply The controllers (DIN or Room Controller) store the load The controllers (DIN or Room Controller) store the load
activation level activation level
Return of the main power supply The controllers return to the state that they were in before The controllers return to the state that they were in before
the power supply interruption the power supply interruption
The adjustment algorithm is deactivated The adjustment algorithm is deactivated
The switch-off delay set on the sensor starts to be The switch-off delay set on the sensor starts to be
measured measured
If no movement/presence is detected, the loads are If no movement/presence is detected, the loads are deacti-
deactivated at the end of the delay vated at the end of the delay

The following table shows the It is presumed that a person is present
behavior of sensors in the case of ECO in a room where there is natural light.
operating mode.
ACTION ON OFF ADJUSTMENT DIMMER REGULATCION

The person enters the room and the lighting level is No action No action
sufficient
The person enters the room and the lighting level is No action until the manual control is pressed No action until the manual control is pressed
insufficient
The person remains in the room, the sensor adjusts If the loads are inactive, they are activated immediately If the loads are inactive, they are activated immediately at
the loads, and the general lighting level decreases If the loads are already active, no action is taken the level prior to the last deactivation
If the loads are active, the level at which they are dimmed
is increased
The person remains in the room, the sensor adjusts If the lighting level exceeds the brightness threshold set If the lighting level exceeds the brightness threshold set
the loads, and the general lighting level increases on the sensor, the loads are deactivated after 10 minutes on the sensor, the level at which the loads are active is
If the lighting level does not exceed the brightness reduced gradually (1% per minute; if the difference is
threshold set on the sensor, no action is taken particularly great, this may take up to one hour)
The person remains in the room, the sensor does No action No action
not adjust the loads, and the general lighting level
decreases
The person remains in the room, the sensor does No action No action
not adjust the loads, and the general lighting level
increases
The person remains in the room, the loads are active Switch-off control (OFF): immediate deactivation of all Switch-off control (OFF): immediate deactivation of all
and the manual control is pressed briefly loads loads
Switch-on control (ON): activation of the adjustment Switch-on control (ON): activation of the adjustment
algorithm algorithm
The person remains in the room, the loads are active The adjustment algorithm is stopped The adjustment algorithm is stopped
and the manual control is pressed and held down No effect on the loads Immediate increase or decrease of the load activation
level
The person remains in the room, the loads are inactive Switch-off control (OFF): stopping of the adjustment Switch-off control (OFF): stopping of the adjustment
and the manual control is pressed briefly algorithm algorithm
Switch-on control (ON): activation of the loads and of the Switch-on control (ON): activation of the adjustment algo-
adjustment algorithm rithm and of the load levels prior to the last deactivation
The person remains in the room, the loads are inactive The adjustment algorithm is deactivated The adjustment algorithm is deactivated
and the manual control is pressed and held down Immediate activation of the loads Activation of the loads and increase or decrease of the
load activation level
The person leaves the room Deactivation of the loads and deactivation of the adjust- Deactivation of the loads and deactivation of the adjust-
ment algorithm at the end of the delay set on the sensor ment algorithm at the end of the delay set on the sensor
Interruption of the main power supply The controllers (DIN or Room Controller) store the load The controllers (DIN or Room Controller) store the load
activation level activation level
Return of the main power supply The controllers return to the state that they were in before The controllers return to the state that they were in before
the power supply interruption the power supply interruption
The adjustment algorithm is deactivated The adjustment algorithm is deactivated
The switch-off delay set on the sensor starts to be The switch-off delay set on the sensor starts to be
measured measured
If no movement/presence is detected, the loads are If no movement/presence is detected, the loads are
deactivated at the end of the delay deactivated at the end of the delay


MEASUREMENT OF THE LIGHTING LEVEL
The lighting level in the room is Making a comparison with the set on level of the loads.
measured by the sensor by means of brightness threshold, the sensor
the built-in brightness cell. adjusts the status or the switching-
ON OFF ADJUSTMENT
This type of adjustment allows the artificial light supplied). In the switch-off command. This avoids any
only the switching on or complete case where the total lighting level involuntary switching off that might
switching off of the load, it is not (natural light + artificial light) exceeds cause people problems.
possible to adjust intermediate levels. the established threshold, the loads
To activate the switch-off control the will be deactivated. This threshold
sensor measures the level natural must be exceeded for at least 10
light (differentiating between it and minutes, before the sensor gives the
ON-OFF ADJUSTMENT IN AUTO MODE
LEGEND:
Brightness threshold: value expressed in lux,
Ambient
illuminance (lux) pre-set in the factory but can be modified by the user.
Represents the threshold below which the sensor
OFF level controls the activation of the loads.
OFF level: value expressed in lux, pre-calculated by the
sensor, which represents the threshold above which the
sensor controls the deactivation of the loads. This value
Brightness is composed of the sum of the lighting level and of
threshold the contribution of artificial light supplied by the light
fixtures installed in the room.
Delay: value expressed in hours, minutes or seconds,
pre-set in the factory but can be modified by the user; it
represents the time threshold beyond which switching-
off is determined following the failure to detect any
10 min 20 sec Delay Time movement/presence
time (min.)
1 2 3 4 5
Explanation: 3. Room occupied: as the the lighting of the room decreases;

Consumi
1. Room not occupied: as the
energici (kWh) contribution of natural lighting when the lighting level is exceeded in
contribution of natural lighting grows, the lighting of the room a downward direction and 20 seconds
100 %
increases, the lighting in the room increases; when the OFF level is have passed below that level, the
increases exceeded and 10 minutes have sensor deactivates the load through
2. Detection of presence: the sensor passed above that level, the sensor the actuator
detects a presence and checks a deactivates the load through the 5. Failure to detect movement/
value of lux below the set brightness actuator presence: after the delay, the sensor
threshold, then adjusts the load 4. Room occupied: as the deactivates the load through the
through the
0 %actuator contribution of natural lighting falls, actuator
Tempo
(min.)
DIMMER ADJUSTMENT
This type of adjustment allows you particular algorithm manages the decreasing variation more slowly
to adjust the load activation level increasing variation rapidly (so (to avoid tiring the eyesight with
constantly, varying it and adapting that people are not left in the dark fluctuations).
it to environmental conditions. A when they enter a room) and the
DIMMER ADJUSTMENT IN AUTO MODE

legend:
Brightness threshold: value expressed in lux,
Ambient pre-set in the factory but can be modified by the user.
illuminance (lux)
Represents the threshold below which the sensor
OFF level controls the activation of the loads.
OFF level: value expressed in lux, pre-calculated by
the sensor, which represents the threshold above which
the sensor controls the deactivation of the loads. This
Brightness value is composed of the sum of the lighting level and of
threshold the contribution of artificial light supplied by the light
fixtures installed in the room.
Delay: value expressed in hours, minutes or seconds,
pre-set in the factory but can be modified by the user; it
represents the time threshold beyond which switching-
off is determined following the failure to detect any
10 min 20 sec Delay Time movement/presence
time (min.)
1 2 3 4 5
Explanation: required lighting. the lighting of the room decreases;
Consumi
1. Room
energici not
(kWh)occupied: as the 3. Room occupied: as the when the lighting level is exceeded in
contribution of natural lighting contribution of natural lighting a downward direction and 20 seconds
100 %
increases, the lighting in the room grows, the lighting of the room have passed below that level, the
increases increases; when the OFF level is sensor deactivates the load through
2. Detection of presence: the sensor exceeded and 10 minutes have the actuator
detects a presence and checks a passed above that level, the sensor 5. Failure to detect movement/
value of lux below the set brightness deactivates the load through the presence: after the delay, the sensor
threshold and then, through the actuator deactivates the load through the
3%
actuator, adjusts
0 % the load at a 4. Room occupied: as the actuator
Tempo
sufficient load to ensure the contribution of natural lighting
(min.)
falls,
The time intervals to pass from a load activation level of 0% to 100%, and vice-versa, vary and depend on the type of control
adopted:
1-10V DALI
Variation from 0% to 100%: from 2 to 6 seconds Variation from 0% to 100%: from 2 to 6 seconds
Variation from 100% to 0%: about 40 minutes with a non-linear trend Variation from 100% to 0%: about 6 minutes
ADVICE FOR GOOD ADJUSTMENT

Natural light should be distributed 20 m², with a height of 2.5 m. to avoid problems of reciprocal
as uniformly as possible and it is However, this does not preclude "influence", or interference with light
preferable not to use dividing walls adjusting in an area smaller than 12 sources that are too close.
perpendicular to the windows. m², as long as it is an enclosed space.
The area for measuring the lighting The distance between two sensors
level should vary from about 12 to must be at least three meters,

POSITIONING THE SENSOR FOR A CORRECT MEASUREMENT OF THE LIGHTING LEVEL
In a lighting management system, EXAMPLE:

the positioning of the sensors is for a ceiling height of 2.8 m and a
a matter of prime importance for maximum window height of 2.5 m,
ensuring correct operation. Below is the sensor can be placed from 2.8 to
a series of practical advice that will be 5 m from the window.
useful during installation. If this limit is exceeded, the lighting
adjustment based on the natural
To obtain a satisfactory result in light will be less effective, because
adjusting the lighting, it is advisable the brightness cell of the sensor will
to have at least one opening receive a smaller amount of natural
(window) towards the outside. light.
It is important for the sensor to be
placed at a distance between 1 time
the height of the room and maximum
1.7 to 2 times the height of the
window.
L Max = (from
L Max 1.5
= (1.5 à 2to)*h
2)*h
f w
L
L Min
Min == 1*h
1*h
hf
h
hw h

WHAT TO DO:
Use double-technology sensors

Keep a minimum distance of 3

in closed, restricted or generally meters between two double-
limited ares; technology sensors;
Use double-technology sensors in
Generally, position the sensors

areas characterized by sedentary above or close to the main control
presence or low-mobility activities areas in the space in question;
(office, meeting rooms...); Subdivide large areas into sub-

Use passive infrared sensors in
areas, each controlled by different
open, non-restricted areas; sensors;
Position passive infrared sensors
Instruct the users of the system

perpendicular to the trajectory of about the new devices and how to
the space users; use them.
Position double-technology

sensors parallel to the trajectory of
the space users;
WHAT NOT TO DO:

sensors at less than 2 meters from Manage the safety lighting and

areas characterized by sedentary cooling/heating sources (fan coils, emergency exits by means of
presence or low-mobility activities splitters, outlets...); sensors.
(office, meeting rooms...); Position double-technology

sensors one facing the other;
areas where objects, modules Position passive infrared sensors

or walls could interfere with in places where the room
detection; temperature is very close to that of
Use double-technology sensors in
the human body;
areas where the ceiling is higher Position double-technology

than 4 meters; sensors on walls, ceilings or
Position double-technology
surfaces subject to vibrations;


SENSOR MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Shown below are some cases of Each of the solving procedures control menus and the parameters
the most common malfunctions envisages the use of the advanced concerned are shown in bold
due mainly to incorrect calibration, configuration remote control, item print. For all further details on the
configuration or positioning of the BMSO4001, to which it refers several parameters of the sensors or of the
sensors; the main methods of solving times regarding the menus to be remote control, see the respective
the problems are also listed for each accessed or the parameters to be technical sheets.
type. changed. The names of the remove
Malfunction due to an incorrect detection of movement/

MALFUNCTION 1:
presence.
Failed or slow switching-on:
Parameters to be changed:
Case of double-technology sensor (PIR+US)
Delay;

Sensitivity;

Detecting diagram.

STEP 1: Identifying the technology that causes the STEP 2: Solving the problem
problems 1. Return the “Detection diagram” to the factory
1. Adjust the “Delay” at 30 seconds. setting (initial = PIR and US; maintenance = PIR or US;
2. On the “Detecting diagram” menu, adjust the three de- retrigger = PIR or US).
tections (initial, maintenance and retrigger) only in “US”. 2. Gradually reduce the “Sensitivity” of the technology
3. From the “Test” menu of the remote control, send that is causing problems.
the “Initial status” value and leave the detecting 3. From the “Test” menu, send the “Initial status”
area. value and leave the sensor detecting area.
If the problem persists, the technology that is causing problems is the US.
STEP 3: Complete if necessary
If the problem has not been solved: 1. Modify the “Detecting diagram” to make detection
1. On the “Detecting diagram” menu, adjust the three more powerful (initial = PIR and US; maintenance =
detections (initial, maintenance and retrigger) PIR and US; retrigger = deactivated), or eliminate the
only in “PIR”. technology that is causing problems by passing only
2. From the “Test” menu, send the “Initial status” to PIR or only to US as regards initial detection and
value and leave the sensor detecting area. maintenance.
If the problem persists, the technology that is causing problems is the PIR. 2. If the malfunction persists, it is necessary to move the
sensor away from the source of the problems (e.g. air
flow coming from heating or air conditioning).
3. Reset the “Delay” at the value requested by the user.

STEP 1: Solving the problem
MALFUNCTION 2:
1. Adjust the “Delay” at 30 seconds.
Failed or slow switching-on:
2. Gradually reduce the “Sensitivity”.
Case of PIR single-technology sensor
3. From the “Test” menu, send the “Initial status” value
Malfunction due to an incorrect detection and leave the room between one test and another.
of movement/presence. If the malfunction persists, it is necessary to move the
Parameters to be changed: sensor away from the source of the problems (e.g. air
Delay;
flow coming from heating or air conditioning).
Sensitivity.
4. Reset the “Delay” at the value requested by the user.
Malfunction due to an incorrect detection of the lighting

MALFUNCTION 3:
level.
After detecting a movement/presence, the light
switches on even though the lighting level is
Brightness threshold.

sufficient
STEP 1: Solving the problem 7. Calculate the average of the values obtained.
1. Reduce the “Brightness threshold”. 8. Send the average value obtained from the
2. From the “Test” menu, send the “Initial status” value. “Advanced mode/Calibration” menu of the
3. Wait five seconds, them move about to be detected. configuration remote control BMSO4001.
4. Repeat the procedure until the light no longer 9. From the “Test” menu, send the “Initial status”
switches on. value.
10. Using the configuration remote control, read the
Particular case (Expert mode): set of sensor parameters from the main menu.
Solving without changing the brightness threshold 11. Go to the “Advanced mode/Calibration” menu
(Sometimes it is better not to change the brightness and compare the value displayed with those
threshold set according to the user's preferences. In detected by the luxmeter (repeat the process from
this case, it is opportune to re-calibrate the sensor.) point 2 to point 11 if the external brightness level
- Expert mode with luxmeter. has varied).
1. Deactivate the artificial lighting. 12. Repeat the procedure until an optimal result is
2. Measure the lighting level in various strategic obtained.
positions in the sensor coverage area.
3. Calculate the average of the values obtained.
4. Send the average value obtained from the “Advanced
mode/Calibration” menu of the configuration remote If the sensor calibration has been excessively
control BMSO4001. modified and there are adjusting problems, it is
5. Activate the natural lighting and lower the shutters advised to restore the factory settings; briefly press
(or wait for the sun to go down). and then hold down (about 10 seconds) the "Learn"
6. Measure the lighting level in the same strategic button of the sensor.
positions used in point 2.

SENSOR MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Malfunction due to an incorrect detection of the lighting

MALFUNCTION 4:
level.
switches off even though the lighting level is
Sensitivity;

insufficient
Delay.

SOLUTION 1: SOLUTION 2:
1. Gradually increase the "Sensitivity" or sensitivities and 1. Increase the "Delay" and send the "Initial status" value
send the "Initial status" value from the "test" menu. from the "test" menu.
Move the sensor closer to the work area. (For work areas, BTicino recommends timing from 10
to 15 minutes)
SOLUTION 3:
1. Move the sensor closer to the work area.
Malfunction due to an incorrect detection of

MALFUNCTION 5:
the lighting level.
does not switch on even though the lighting level
Same solution as in the case "After detecting
is insufficient
a movement/presence, the light switches on
MALFUNCTION 6: even though the lighting level is sufficient"
After detecting a movement/presence, the light (previous page)
does not switch off even though the lighting level

is sufficient
WARNING:
In the case of an ON/OFF managed lamp: the external Safety coefficient = 0.5 x the "Brightness threshold".
brightness must exceed the "Brightness threshold" + a Switch-off level = 1.5 x the "Brightness threshold" +
Safety coefficient; then at least ten more minute must "Light contribution".
pass before it is switched off. When the set "Brightness threshold" is <100 lux, the
In the case of a dimmed lamp: wait from ten to fifteen formula becomes:
minutes to see whether the activation level has Switch-off level = 150 lux + "Light contribution".
decreased significantly.

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Lighting management
DIAGRAM 1 SWITCHING ON/OFF OF 2 LAMPS FROM 4 LIGHT POINTS WITH GENERAL ON/OFF CONTROL
N
230 Vac
L
L1 L2
L4671/1 ON
A = 1 L4671/1 ON
A = 1
PL = 1 PL = 2
M = O/I M = O/I
E46ADCN G1 = – G1 = –
OFF G2 = – OFF G2 = –
230 Vac BUS BUS To other

devices
L4652/2 ON
A = GEN L4652/2 A = 1
ON ON
PL1 = – PL1 = 1
GEN M = O/I M1 = O/I
A2 = 1
OFF OFF OFF PL2 = 2
M = O/I
DIAGRAM 2 AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON OF THE LIGHT WITH PASSIVE INFRARED CEILING SENSOR
N
230 Vac
L
3475 L L1
A = 1
1 1
PL = 1
E46ADCN ART. 3475
230V ˜ M = –
2A cosϕ = 0,6
2A G = –
230 Vac BUS To other

devices
A = 1 L4652/2 For other

L4659N PL = 1
ON
M = –
functions
A1 = 1
S = 1 PL1 = 1
T = 6 M1 = O/I
OFF
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on,
and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires. The sensitivity of the PIR motion sensor is set with the configurator in S. For proper operation, it is necessary
to set the illumination Set Point of the sensor (see procedure). If the user switches the light off manually with a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is
detected, for a time set in T

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Management of different loads

DIAGRAM 3 SWITCHING ON AND OFF OF 1 LAMP AND ROLLING SHUTTER CONTROL USING AN ACTUATOR
CONTROL
N
230 Vac
L
L1
L2
A1 = 1 A = 1 ON
E46ADCN PL1
M1
=
=
1

M PL
M
=
=
2
O/I
N
A2 = 1 G1 = –
PL2 = 2 L2 G2 = – OFF
M2 = O/I
L4671M2(*) L4671/1
230 Vac BUS
To other
devices
*Complete the device with key covers as per the drawing: ON
Shutter Light
control control
OFF
DIAGRAM 4 WIRE SYSTEM EXTENSION WITH RADIO CONTROL TO MANAGE TWO LAMPS
230 V ac N
L
F411U1 A = 1 F411U1 A = 1
PL = 1 L1 PL = 2 L2
M = – M = –
E46ADCN G1 = – G1 = –
G2 = – G2 = –
230 Vac To other

devices of the Wire
Automation system
L4578 (*) A = 9
PL = 8
M = –
L4597N A =1
PL1 = 1
PL2 = 2
Note: Replacing actuator F411/1N with actuator dimmer F414 the lamp brightness can be adjusted as well.
Note (*): assign an address not used for other Automation devices. The interface can manage up to 36 radio control devices.

DIAGRAM 5 SWITCHING-ON CONTROL FOR BATHROOM LIGHT AND FAN WITH DELAYED SWITCHING-OFF
230 Vac N
L
Bathroom
M fan
Bathroom
light
F411U1 A = 3 F411U1 A = 3
PL = 1 PL = 1
M = 2 M = SLA
G1 = – G1 = –
G2 = – G2 = –
E46ADCN
230 Vac
BUS To other
devices
L4652/2 ON
A = 3
PL = 1
The ON control turns on the light and the fan at the same time. M = O/I
The OFF control switches the light off while the fan is switched off after
OFF
2 minutes (configurator in M=2 of the Master actuator)
DIAGRAM 6 MOTOR CONTROL IN DIRECT CURRENT FOR MOTORIZED CURTAINS (EXAMPLE 24 V D.C.)
24 Vdc M
+ +
Power supply B F411U2 A = 3 F411U2 A = 3

PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1
PL2 = 1 PL2 = 1
G = – G = –
M = – M = SLA
E46ADCN 230 Vac
BUS
230 Vac
To other
devices
L4652/2 For other

functions
A = 3
It is possible to use direct current motors with other features (12 - 24 - 48 V d.c.) by replacing PL = 1
the compatible power supply unit with the features of the motor (voltage and current), thus M = 
verifying the absorptions of the motor with the actuator relay capacity (F411U2).

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Window and shutter management

DIAGRAM 7 MOTOR CONTROL IN ALTERNATED CURRENT FOR ROLLING SHUTTERS, CURTAINS OR MOTORIZED SHUTTERS
N
230 Vac N N N
L
L1-N = clockwise rotation M1 M2 M3

L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
L2-N = anticlockwise rotation
M = AC motor F411U2 A = 2 F411U2 A = 2 F411U2 A = 2
PL1 = 1 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 3
with 2 windings PL2 = 1 PL2 = 2 PL2 = 3
G = – G = – G = –
M = – M = – M = –
E46ADCN
230 Vac
BUS To other
devices
L4652/3 A = 2 L4652/2 A = GEN

PL1 = 1 PL = –
A2 = 2 GEN M = 
PL2 = 2
A3 = 2
PL3 = 3
M = 
DIAGRAM 8 FOR OPENING/CLOSING MOTORIZED SHUTTERS
M1 M2
N Ap C ˜ Ch Ap C ˜ Ch
230 Vac
L
F411/4 A = 2
PL1 = 1
1 2 3 4 5 PL2 = 1
PL3 = 1
E46ADCN
ART. F411/4
PL4 = 1
C1 C2 C3 C4
M = 1
230 Vac
BUS To other
devices
M1 = motor controlling the internal rabbet shutter

M2 = motor controlling the external rabbet shutter
PL1 - PL2 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted L4652/2 For other
to the internal rabbet shutter functions
PL3 - PL4 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted A = 2
to the external rabbet shutter PL = 1
M = 

Management of dimmed lamps
DIAGRAM 9 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT OF FLUORESCENT LAMPS BY
MEANS OF THE “BALLAST”
N N
230 Vac
L L
+
F413 A = 2
PL1 = 1
M = –
Ballast 1 2 NC 3 4
- +
0-10V
G = –
ART. F413N
N L - + C1
E46ADCN
230 Vac
BUS
To other
devices
L4652/2 ON For other

functions
A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
OFF
M1 = O/I
DIAGRAM 10 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT OF LED LAMPS
N
230 Vac
L
Dimmer
actuator
E46ADCN DIN
F418U2 A = 1
PL1 = 1
PL2 = 2
230 Vac To other

BUS
devices
A1 = 1
L4652/2 For other
PL1 = 1 ON
M = 0/1
functions
A2 = 1
PL2 = 2
OFF
M = 0/1

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Lighting and shutter management

DIAGRAM 11 LIGHTING AND SHUTTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – 100 M2 HOME
Here following is a description of an and two bathrooms. Control of shutters in each room;

Automation system used for lighting Functions performed by the system: Dimmer light control point in the

and shutter management in a home Light general control;
living room and the bedrooms;
of approximately 100 m , consisting 2
Shutters general control;

of living room, kitchen, two bedrooms Control of light points in each room;

DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS IN THE SINGLE ROOMS ITEM

1 lighting general control (1) H4652/2
1 shutter general control (2) H4652/2
ENTRANCE
1 ceiling light point controlled by flush mounted actuator (3) H4671/1
1 control (4) for the corridor light point H4652/2
HALLWAY 2 ceiling light points controlled by flush mounted actuator and 8 other points (4 - 6 - 7 - 9 - 13 - 22 - 28) H4671/1
1 ceiling light point controlled from 1 point (7) and by H4652/2
a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*) F411U1
KITCHEN
1 motorized shutter controlled from 1 point (8) and by H4652/2
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (11) with light intensity adjustment and by H4652/2
1 dimmer actuator in DIN module (*) F415
1 ceiling light point controlled from 2 points (9 - 11) and by H4652/2
LIVING ROOM a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*) F411U1
1 motorized shutter controlled from one point (10) and by H4652/2
1 Touch Screen (12) H4890
1 ceiling light point controlled from 1 point (13) and by H4652/2
BATHROOM 1
1 motorized shutter controlled from one point (14) and by H4652/2
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (16 - 17 - 18) with light intensity adjustment and by H4652/2
ROOM 1 1 wall light point controlled from one point (17) H4652/2
1 wall light point controlled from one point (18) and by H4652/2
1 control (20) for the Corridor Light Point H4652/2
1 Local Display (19) HS4891
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (22 - 23 - 24) with light intensity adjustment and by H4652/2
ROOM 2 1 wall light point controlled from one point (23) H4652/2
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (24) and by H4652/2
1 control (26) for the Corridor Light Point H4652/2
1 Local Display (25) HC4685
NOTE: All the controls must be completed with support, cover plate and key covers for the desired civil series. These can be found in the BTicino General Installation catalog.
For this specific example products of the AXOLUTE civil series have been used.
NOTE (*): All the actuators in DIN module are installed on the 54 module home automation panel in the hall.

Central control using the Touch

Screen installed in the living room;
Recalling of scenarios with Local

Display in the two bedrooms.
HOME AUTOMATION PANEL DIN MODULE HOME AUTOMATION DISTRIBUTION BOARD DIN MODULE
1 SCS power supply 3 DIN dimmer
8 12
12 DIN actuators 1 scenario module

24 2
Total 46

WIRING DIAGRAMS

DIAGRAM 11 LIGHTING AND SHUTTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – 100 M2 HOME
ENTRANCE HALLWAY KITCHEN

L
F420
F411U1
A1 = –
E46ADCN PL = 1 H4671/1 H4671/1 A = 3
PL = 1
ART.F420 ON A1 = 1 ON A1 = 2
PL = 1 PL = 1
OFF M1 = O/I OFF M1 = O/I
3 5
230 Vac
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2

ON A1 = GEN A = GEN ON A1 = 2 ON A1 = 2 ON ON A1 = 3
M = O/I M =  PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1
GEN
M = O/I M = O/I OFF OFF M1 = O/I
OFF OFF OFF
A2 = 2
PL2 = 1
1 2 4 6 7 M2 = O/I
ROOM 2
L
L
F415 F411U2 F411U2
ART.F415
A = 8 A = 8 A = 8
PL = 1 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 4
PL2 = 3 PL2 = 4
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2

A = 2 A = – A1 = 8 A1 = 8 A = 8 A = 8
NOTE: for the configuration of
ON
ON ON ON
ON ON
PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 3 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 4

bathroom 2 refer to bathroom M = O/I M = 4 M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = 
OFF OFF OFF OFF
1, configuring for all the devices
OFF OFF
FUN = 1 A2 = 8 A2 = 8
room A=6 26 25 24 PL2 = 1 23 PL2 = 1 22 21
M2 = O/I M2 = O/I

KITCHEN LIVING ROOM BATHROOM
L
M M M
F411U2 F411U1 F415 F411U2 F411U1 F411U2

A = 3 A = 4 L
A = 4 A = 4 A = 5 A = 5
PL1 = 2 PL = 1 ART.F415
PL = 2 PL1 = 3 PL = 1 PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2 PL2 = 3 PL2 = 2
H4890
H4652/2
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2
A1 = 3 ON ON A1 = 4 A1 = 4 ON
ON A1 = 4 ON ON A1 = 5 A1 = 5
PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 3 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 2
M =  OFF OFF M1 = O/I M =  OFF OFF M1 = O/I OFF OFF M1 = O/I M = 
A2 = 2 A2 = 4 A2 = 2
PL2 = 1 PL2 = 1 PL2 = 1
8 9 M2 = O/I 10 11 M2 = O/I
13 M2 = O/I
14
12
ROOM 1
L
L
F415 F411U2 F411U2
ART.F415
A = 7
A = 7 A = 7
PL = 1
PL1 = 2 PL1 = 4
PL2 = 3 PL2 = 4
H4652/2 HS4891 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2

A1 = 2 A = – A1 = 7 A1 = 7 ON A = 7 A = 7
ON ON ON
ON ON
PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 3 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 4

M = O/I M = 4 M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = 
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
FUN = 1 A2 = 7 A2 = 7
20 19 18 PL2 = 1 17 PL2 = 1 16 15
M2 = O/I M2 = O/I

WIRING DIAGRAMS

DIAGRAM 12 LIGHTING SYSTEM WITH PRESENCE AND LIGHTING SENSORS - LARGE MEETING ROOM
The dimmer SCS 1-10 V item and deactivates the general lighting 3) and the general lights (circuit 1)
BMDI1002 manages all the lighting of the room (circuit 1) automatically, are managed by means of the SCS
circuits in the room: it switches on/off based on the detection of presence control with three modules, item
the lights of the screen (circuit 2), the and the contribution of natural light. L4652/3.
blackboard (circuit 3) and adjusts the It is also possible to adjust the light The shutters (circuit 5, 6 and 7) and
general lights (circuit 1). manually with one of the buttons of the lifting and lowering of the screen
The double-technology sensor SCS the SCS control with three modules, (circuit 2) are controlled by the three
item BMSE3003, configured in ECO item L4652/3, installed near the SCS actuators, item F411/2, and
mode, is installed in the center of the entrance. The lights of the screen adjusted by the special SCS control,
room to ensure optimum detection (circuit 2), the blackboard (circuit item L4651M2.
L L
N N
Shutter Shutter Shutter Screen Central control 1 Screen 1 Blackboard
motor motor motor motor unit 10 x 72 W halogen halogen
7 6 5 lamps
4 1 2 3
F411U2 F411U2 F411U2 F411U2 BMDI1002 E46ADCN

N L N L
230 V 230 V
SCS
L4652/3 L4651M2 BMSE3003
1. Install the double-technology SCS actuators item F411U2 + the software.

ceiling sensor item BMSE3003 in four-channel dimmer 1-10 V item 5. The sensor has the following
the center of the room to ensure BMDI1002 + the SCS power supply factory pre-settings: delay 15
optimal detection; install the SCS item E46ADCN in a cabinet. minutes, brightness threshold 500
control with three modules item 3. Connect all the devices to one lux, PIR maximum sensitivity and
L4652/3; install the special SCS another with the SCS cable item US high sensitivity. If necessary, use
control item L4651M2 between the L4669, L4669/500, L4669HF. the configuration remote control
screen and the shutters. 4. Configure the sensors, controls and item BMSO4001 to change the
2. Install the two-channel SCS controller with the MyHOME_Suite sensor parameters.

DIAGRAM 13 LIGHTING SYSTEM WITH PRESENCE AND LIGHTING SENSORS - HALL AND RECEPTION
Each ceiling sensor, either passive sensors are configured to maintain

infrared item BMSE3001 or double- 500 lux and 100 lux respectively in
technology item BMSE3003, controls the reception area and on the stairs.
the respective area (circuit 1, 2 It is also possible to activate the
and 3). During the day, lighting is lighting using a touch screen item H/
automatically adjusted according LN4890.
to presence or movement and the
contribution of natural light: the
L1
L2
N
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3
230 V 230 V 230 V

N L N L N L
E49
F417U2 F416U1
BUS/SCS
LN4890
BMSE3001 BMSE3003 BMSE3003
1. Install the double-technology 3. Install the SCS touch screen item minutes, brightness threshold 500
or passive infrared SCS ceiling LN4890 on the wall. lux, PIR maximum sensitivity and
sensors, items BMSE3003 and 4. Connect all the devices to one US high sensitivity.
BMSE3001, in the center of each of another with the SCS cable item If necessary, use the configuration
the areas to be controlled. L4669, L4669/500, L4669HF. remote control item BMSO4001 to
2. Install the SCS power supply item 5. Configure all the installed devices change the sensor parameters.
E46ADCN and the SCS dimmers with the MyHOME_Suite software.
item F417U2 and item F416U1 in 6. The sensors have the following
the hall switch cabinet. factory pre-settings: delay 15

86 MyHOME Energy management
CONTENTS
MyHOME – Energy management
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Energy consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Energy management MyHOME 87

CONTENTS
MyHOME – Temperature control
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

GENERAL FEATURES
The devices
The MyHOME temperature control Using the Driver manager item F459
system consists of the following it is possible to integrate systems
devices: made by other manufacturers and
Power supply
control their functions with MyHOME
Temperature control central unit
devices. For more details refer to
Probes
the chapter “System integration and
Actuators
control" of this guide.
Contact interface (OPTIONAL)

99 zone Probe
control unit zone 1
Power supply
Actuator 8 relay
for solenoid valves actuator
0÷10V zone 1
Cold
M
0÷10V
Hot

Outdoor radio
probe
Probe Outdoor Probe Local

zone 2 radio probe zone 99 Display
interface
BUS
2 relay Contact interface

actuator
zone 2
SYSTEMS
OF OTHER MANUFACTURERS
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

DAIKIN

HITACHI

SAMSUNG

Driver manager F459
..............


GENERAL FEATURES
The devices
4 zone central unit
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
CENTRAL UNITS
These devices ensure simple
management/programming of the
whole system, thanks to a guided
menu, it will be possible to select
the operating mode, display the
temperatures of the various zones
(up to 99) and change the daily and
weekly programs.
PC PROGRAMMING
The central unit can be programmed
using the universal software
MyHOME_Suite which is also useful
for configuring probes, thermo
actuators and Automation and
Energy Management devices.
SELECTION OF THE FUNCTIONS WHICH CAN BE MANAGED BY THE CENTRAL UNIT
1 ZONE PROBE/CENTRAL
POSSIBLE FUNCTIONS 4 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT 99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT
UNIT
18.0°C
23.7°C
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
H4691 HC/HS4695, 7 8 9
LN4691 L/N/NT4695, 0
AM5875
3550
Maximum number of zones 1 4 99

Remote control
Local control (Touch Screen) 1)
Programming with MyHOME_Suite

Magnetic contacts management
Scenarios
Weekly, hourly profiles, etc. management
NOTE 1): if used without central unit it can not be controlled by Touch Screen, Web Server, scenario programmer and scenario module.

TEMPERATURE PROBE
These devices must be installed in local variation of the temperature
FAN-COILS speed.

each zone, for the room temperature with respect to the value set in the The catalog includes the following
measurement. They control the central unit; probes:
system setting: the operating modes;

Thermostat with display Basic probe Probe with selector

Device with a 4 keys to select the Flush mounted probe for the Device as above, equipped with knob
desired temperature and the different temperature measurement between for adjusting the temperature of +/-
operating modes: both automatic 3 - 40°C. The device has no knob for 3 °C related to the set temperature
and manual, as well as Eco, Comfort, the temperature adjustment, so it and operating mode selection.
Antifreeze/heat protection and OFF is suitable for installation in public Suitable for installation in residential
presets. places/small businesses in the service buildings.
If the fan-coil is installed in the sector.
system it can manage the fan speed. It can be used as a slave probe it is
It can also be used in mixed heating/ required to control rooms with very
cooling systems in the case in which large surfaces.
the two functions are simultaneously
available on the same system.
In the back it has two terminals
for connecting a NC/NO contact
for windows, useful to change
the operating mode according to
the status (open or closed) of the
window.
Probe for FAN COIL control
Probe with the same characteristics
as the previous one, but with
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC selection of
the speed for Fan
Coil and Idrorelax system.

GENERAL FEATURES
The devices
LOCAL DISPLAY Unlike the probe with selector, it is

This multifunctional device is possible to set any local temperature
equipped with a display can be used that will remain so until the system
in a temperature control system status is updated.
as a probe if coupled to the basic
temperature probe or to an external
sensor art. 3457.
ACTUATORS
Designed for mounting in DIN of the temperature control system.
Attuatore 8 relè F430R8
switchboards these devices control The range consists of:
the solenoid valves and the pumps
Schemi di collegamento
With
Esempio relay output
di collegamento with NO
di un fan-coil 4 tubi con valvole On/Off.
contacts, type F430/2 (2 contacts), contacts) for the control of ON/OFF installed in the system. it will also be
F430/4 (4 contacts) and F430R8 (8 valves and pumps. If fan-coils are possible to manage the fan speed.
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 5
OUT 4
N
230 Vac
L
L1 L2
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
N
OUT 5
OUT 4
F430R8
Use of the actuator F430/8 for the control of a 4-pipe fan coil and 3 speeds.

Attuatore per fan-coil con valvole 0 – 10 V F430R3V10
With voltage
Schemi
output 0-10V,
di collegamento
typediF430R3V10
Esempio collegamento di (also 4 tubi con valvole 0 – 10 V. to control proportional solenoid
equipped
un fan-coil
with 3 NC contacts) and F430V10 valves type 0-10.
OUT 3
OUT 2
M 0 – 10 V OUT 1
N
230 Vac
M 0 – 10 V L
L1
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
N
–
5
+
6
–
+
7 F430R3V10
8
Use of the actuator F430R3V10 for the control of a 4-pipe fan coil with 0-10 valves and 3 speeds.

GENERAL FEATURES
The devices
DEVICES SELECTION DEPENDING ON THE SYSTEM TO BE CONTROLLED
ACTUATORS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C1 C2 C3 C4
F430/2 F430/4 F430R8 F430R3V10 F430V10
ON/OFF
OPEN/CLOSE
VALVES
3 POINTS
0-10V
2 PIPES ON/OFF
4 PIPES ON/OFF
FANCOIL 2 PIPES 3 POINTS
4 PIPES 3 POINTS
2/4 PIPES 0-10V
ELECTRIC HEATING
CLIMAVENETA
MIXED ON/OFF + FANCOIL
NOTE 1): It is not possible to change the speeds from the probes
NOTE 2): The loads are controlled correctly but it is more economic to use the probes without speed control
NOTE 3): For the first version of the actuators for valves 0-10 (NO Speed) 0 = off; 10 = max
NOTE 3) The probes 4691 and probes 4692,4693,4692FAN (ver6) must be configured with MyHOME_Suite 1,3,x
WARNING: Systems made with "old" loads and "new" load must only be configured using MyHOME_Suite 1,3,x.
The central unit must do the SELF-LEARNING but not the SENDING by zones.

PROBES CENTRAL UNITS
18.0°C
23.7°C
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
C OK
H4691 HC/HS4692 HC/HS4692FAN HC/HS4891 OK HC/HS4695

LN4691 L/N/NT4692 L/N/NT4692FAN L/N/NT4891 1 2 3 L/N/NT4695
In conjunction with probe 4
7
5
8
6
9 AM5875
item 0
HC/HS4693,
L/N/NT4693 3550
or with external probe item
HC/HS4693 3457
L/N/NT4693
2)
2)
3) 3) 3)
3) 3) 3)
1)
3) 1) 3)
3) 3) 3)
3) 3) 3)
3) 3) 3)
2)
1)

GENERAL FEATURES
The devices
PERFECT INTEGRATION
PERFECT INTEGRATION WITH
THE MYHOME SYSTEM the central unit (e.g. weekly mode, Manual supplied as standard with
Example of integration between external probe scenarios mode, etc.). Touch Screen IP.
Temperature Control and Automation For further information see the User
The temperature control system MyHOME_Screen 10
can be integrated with MyHOME

Automation, for the management
of the temperature in the different
zones of the house, using MyHOME_
Screen 3.5, MyHOME_Screen 10 and
Video Display.
In particular, using Touch Screen IP
it is possible to manage not only the
temperature in the different zones,
but also those functions that up to
now have always been managed by
MyHOME_Screen 3.5
Example of integration between outside, for example when the air windows is detected by the contact
Temperature Control and Automation inside the house is being changed. interface module of the Burglar-
The integration between MyHOME In practical terms, when doors or Alarm system, which reads the
Burglar-Alarm and Temperature windows of a room are opened, the condition of the NC contact installed
Control systems allows the set-up heating system of the temperature on the door or window, and transfers
of a particularly useful function in control zone corresponding to that the information to the Temperature
terms of energy saving, avoiding room is automatically turned off. Control system for the appropriate
unwanted escape of energy to the The opening or closing of doors and actions.
Magnetic contact
Contacts Radiator
interface off
Temperature control
Opening of window central unit

Maximum number of devices, maximum distances and

absorptions
The maximum number of devices For the calculations mentioned the total length of the connections

which can be connected to the BUS above, refer to the technical data must not exceed 500 m.
depend on two factors: listed in the technical sheets of the For the purpose of optimal
maximum number of addresses: a
device. distribution of the currents on
system can manage up to 99 zone When calculating the absorptions the BUS line it is advised to put
addresses. Up to nine addresses the availability of current as a the power supply in intermediate
dedicated to the actuators can be function of the length of the BUS position.
managed for each zone. cable must also be considered.
Total power consumption of
During the sizing therefore respect
devices: the sum of the absorption the following rules:
of all the items in total must not the connection between the

exceed the maximum current power supply and the furthest
which can be supplied by the device must not be more than 250
power supply which is 1200 mA m long;
for item E46ADCN and 600 mA for
item E49.
MAXIMUM DISTANCES OF THE BUS CABLE
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
With E46ADCN power supply:

A
A = 250 m max
B = 250 m max
B
E46ADCN A+B=
500 m
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, distances must halved.

Maximum number of devices, maximum distances and

absorptions
PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE

In large systems or systems which If a BUS system with only
on the input BUS (IN) the

have current absorption greater than temperature control devices must Automation device addresses must
the limit of 1200 mA supplied by be extended, positions I3 and I4 of be between A = 1 / PL = 1 and A =
the power supply E46ADCN or 600 the interface must be configured 3 / PL = 1;
mA supplied by the E49 compact with addresses I3 = 1 – 9 and I4 = on the output BUS (OUT) the

power supply, split the system 1 – 9 completely independent from addresses must be between A
into several sections connected to the Temperature control device = 3 / PL = 3 and A = 9 / PL = 9 or
each other using the F422 interface addresses; the address of the next interface.
configured in “physical expansion” If a BUS system with Automation
It should be stressed that all the
mode. It is important to remember and temperature control devices temperature control devices on the
that each line must be powered by must be extended, positions I3 system section must be configured
its own power supply. To produce the and I4 must be configured as a totally independently of the
“physical expansion” mode interface function of the configuration of Automation device configuration.
item F422 must be configured by the Automation devices in the two In any case no automation device
inserting numeric configurator 1 in connected systems. Referring to must be configured with the same
the MOD position. Positions I3 and I4 the illustration, supposing that for address (A, PL) as interface F422
of the interface must be configured example I3=3, I4 = 2: (I3, I4).
as a function of the two modes of
use of the interface itself as indicated
below:
A/PL = 33
53
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OK
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF 1 2 3
F
4
+2
5 6
+3
7 8 9
0
F422 OUT I1 = – F422 I1 = –

OUT
I2 = – OUT
I2 = –
AR T.F422
IN I3 = 3 AR T.F422
I3 = 5
I4 = 2 I4 = 4
MOD = 1 MOD = 1
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
A/PL = 55 99
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
A/PL = 11 31

Combining with other functions
The Temperature control function DIN actuators. The above is also valid BUS cable and the total absorption
devices can share the same BUS if the pre-existing MyHOME system of the devices as prescribed in this
cable as other MyHOME automation has several Automation systems document.
and emergency management connected using interfaces item F422 For systems which also have
applications (gray cable). If there configured in the “logical expansion” the burglar-alarm function, the
is already a stable cable with the mode. Temperature control must not be
automation or power management In the case of systems with "logical installed on the same BUS as the
BUS the Temperature control items expansion" there is no constraint burglar-alarm, but there must be
can be added at any point in the for the installation of temperature an F422 interface between the two
system, after installing a box item control devices, which can be BUSES.
503E for the control units, one or installed at any point in the system.
more boxes positioned at a height Therefore, for proper system sizing, it
of 1.5 m for each temperature probe is only necessary to check the length
and a unit with enough room for the of the connections made with the
A/PL = 11
99
OUT I1 = –
OUT I2 = –
AR T.F422
I3 = –
ZA = 1 ZA = 1 I4 = 1
-2 -1
ZB = 1 -2 -1
ZB = 1 MOD = 2
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
OK
IN 1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
A/PL = 11 99
ZA = 3
OUT I1 = – -2 -1
ZB = 2
I2 = –
-3
+1 OF
F
OUT
+2
+3
AR T.F422 I3 = –
ZA = 2 I4 = 2
-2 -1
ZB = 1 MOD = 2
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
IN
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OUT I1 = –
I2 = –
OUT
OUT
24h
˜2
AR T.F422
I3 = –
1
I4 = 1
TEST
S PROG 3 4
AUX P MOD = 4
IN

Correct mode of installation for 4 zone control unit, probes

and magnetic contacts
THE 4 ZONE CONTROL UNIT AND

THE PROBES inside standard flush-mounting, resolving issues with pre-existing BUS
Must be installed at a height of or wall-mounting boxes; Surface systems that cannot be expanded.
approximately 1.5 m, away from areas installation may be useful for
that may affect the reading of the
room temperature, such as nearby
windows, fan-coils, or radiators. -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
-2 -1
-3
-2 -1
The probes may be installed both

+1 OFF
+2
-3
+3
+1 OFF
+2
+3
1,5m
CALIBRATION OF THE 4 ZONE

CENTRAL UNIT AND THE PROBES
The probes and the 4 zone central Before performing the calibration sample thermometer, correctly
unit do not normally need calibration; operation, ensure the following: placed inside the room.
however, in particular installation Leave the probes connected and
For more details on the calibration
situations (perimeter walls, north or powered with the hydraulic system procedure, refer to the central unit
south facing walls, when close to heat off for at least two hours. During installation manuals.
sources, etc.), the temperature value this time, avoid any changes in the
measured may be corrected using room temperature (e.g. by opening
the appropriate calibration function, or closing windows, doors, etc.)
which can be found in the central and avoid standing near them;
unit menu. For the calibration use a calibrated

MAGNETIC CONTACTS
They are generally installed in the generally not used in temperature If the contact interface is correctly
upper part of the window frames control. It is mainly useful for configured it can support both
and in the point furthest away preventing tampering such as cutting applications. When the temperature
from the hinges. In this way small the wires in burglar-alarm systems. control system is being installed the
openings cause the magnet to move If the same MyHOME system has protection line should be installed
away from the contact reed and the temperature control and burglar- and wired as well, so that the burglar-
contact itself consequently opens. alarm applications the same alarm can be installed as well.
The models in the catalog are of NC magnetic contacts can be used for
type and also have a protection line both functions at the same time.
FOR FLUSH-MOUNTING INSTALLATION FOR VISIBLE INSTALLATION 3511

3510, 3510M, 3510PB
Magnet Contact
Magnet Contact
Magnet
Magnet
Contact
Contact Protection
Protection
line
line
NC contact
NC contact
Layout of solenoid valves and actuators
The typical installation requires the

Solenoid valve Box
positioning of all solenoid valves on actuators 1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
box
the collector, grouped inside a box

in the boiler room. In this case it is
recommended that also all actuators Hydraulic
are grouped, inside a control unit, collector
installed nearby the box itself. In Zone

multi-floor buildings, this solution solenoid valve
may be repeated at every floor.

Box
FAN-COIL SYSTEMS
In fan-coil systems the solenoid valve
Installation of the solenoid valve inside 2 pipe fan-coils Installation of the solenoid valve inside 4 pipe fan-coils
can be installed inside the fan-coil
itself. In 2 pipe systems the solenoid
valve is only one for both heating and
cooling functions. In 4 pipe systems,
2 separate solenoid valves are used,
M M
one for the heating and the other for

the cooling function.
RADIANT PANEL SYSTEMS

In radiant panel systems it will be 3-way
Actuators
necessary to install, after the pump, mixing valve Zone Protection
solenoid valve switch
a three-way mixing valve capable
of mixing the water, so that the
maximum temperature limit set is
not exceeded. The mixing valve is
managed by a central unit supplied
by the manufacturer of the radiant M
panel system.
To the zone radiant panels 230 Vac
To other devicesPower supply
Circulation Mixing valve

pump management central unit

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Symbol legend
To make the reading of the diagrams shown in the following pages easier, the various symbols and their functions are
summarized.
General valve symbol
Radiators Electric radiator Boiler
ON/OFF solenoid valve
Open/close solenoid valve

0÷10V
Radiant panels Fan-coil Chiller
Non-return valve
M
Pump Three-way mixing valve (*)
(*) NOTE: in radiant heating panel systems this valve has the function of mixing water, to ensure that the water itself, and therefore also the floor, remain below a certain
temperature limit. For this reason, the mixing valve must be controlled by a control unit supplied by the radiant heating panel system supplier.

CONTENTS MyHOME – Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
DIAGRAM 1 - Heating with RADIANT PANELS with window contact management. . . .106
DIAGRAM 2 - heating with radiant panels with window contact management. . . 110
Villas and 4-zone homes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

DIAGRAM 3 - Central heating with radiant panels for several homes . . . . . . . . . 114
DIAGRAM 4 - Heating with radiator with 0÷10 v solenoid valve. . . . . . . . . . . . 118
DIAGRAM 5 - Heating and cooling with 4-pipe fan-coil and 0÷10V solenoid valve. . . 120
DIAGRAM 6 - Heating and cooling with 4-pipe fan-coil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DIAGRAM 7 - Radiator heating and fan-coil cooling with
customized adjustment profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
DIAGRAM 8 - Heating with radiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
DIAGRAM 9 - Heating with radiant panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
DIAGRAM 10 - Heating with radiant panels and heating units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
DIAGRAM 11 - Heating and cooling with climaveneta fan-coil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
DIAGRAM 12 - Heating and cooling with climaveneta air conditioning
and combination boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

DIAGRAM 13 - Heating with Radiant panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
DIAGRAM 14 - Radiant panels heating and cooling and dehumidifier fan-coil. . . . 142
8 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

DIAGRAM 15 - Heating with radiators and fan-coil cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Service sector, 12 zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

DIAGRAM 16 - 2 pipe, 3 speed fan-coil, single heating and cooling system . . . . . 148
Integration with systems of other manufacturers. 152

DIAGRAM 17 - Temperature control system integration with heating radiant panel . .
and cooling systems vrv by daikin (ip protocol ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DIAGRAM 18 - Temperature control system integration with heating and cooling . . .
systems with radiant panels hitachi (modbus protocol) . . . . . . . . 153
DIAGRAM 19 - Temperature control system integration with fancoil system with . . . .
proportional control 0-10v. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
DIAGRAM 20 - Temperature control system integration with heating and cooling . . .
systems with radiant panels rehau. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
DIAGRAM 21 - Heating plus cooling scheduled by bacnet controller
(auto-changeover). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
DIAGRAM 22 - Heating plus cooling managed by bacnet
(MyHOME central unit as a scheduler). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
DIAGRAM 23 - Heating managed by MyHOME, cooling managed by bacnet (MyHOME
central unit manages heating and cooling profiles; no auto-changeover). 160

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 1 HEATING WITH RADIANT PANELS WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT
C4 C3 C2 C1
(*) F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C1 T - C1 - C2
4692 ART. F430/4
Actuator
ART.F482
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
T C2 C1 F
+2
Actuator
+3
ZONE 3 F482 Probe
(*) 4692
-2 -1
C2
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
BUS
Probe 3550
ZONE 2
(*) E46ADCN
4692
C1
OK
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482 1 2 3
4 5 6
-2 -1 7 8 9
-3
+1 OF 0
T C2 C1 F
+2
+3
Actuator Central unit Power supply

ZONE 1 F482 Probe
Actuator
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
Mixing valve management C1 C2
central unit
F430/2
C1 N
Circulation pump
M
Boiler
(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to the magnetic
contacts must not exceed 50 meters.
NOTE:For the radiant panels management center connection refer to the diagram No. 21.

next >>
99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

CONFIGURATION
The 99 zone control unit item 3550 configurators but, to end the supplied with the products. When
must be used to use the magnetic system configuration operations, setting the parameters for the
contact management function. The it is necessary to interact with the management of the magnetic
function is not in fact available on “Configure zones” menu. contacts, the TiThermo application
the 4 zone control unit item HC/ As an alternative the TiThermo must be used. Two parameters may
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875. application can be used. For these be set: the reaction time and the
This device does not need physical operations refer to the manual reactivation time.
REACTION
TIME
OK
REACTIVATION 1
4
2
5
3
6
7 8 9
TIME 0

TiThermo screen 3550
REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from window frame avoiding switching needed for the changes of air, for
0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of the corresponding temperature example opening a window to close
delay to the deactivation of the control zone OFF. Setting 0 minutes or open the shutters, or opening the
temperature control zone. During deactivation is practically instant. entrance door to welcome a person.
this time the system completely This function is suitable for short
ignores the opening of the openings of windows or doors not
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOSED OPENING CLOSING CLOSED
t = 0÷2
time can be set

from 0 to 2 minutes
radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel

ON kept ON kept ON ON

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
<< previous
REACTIVATION TIME
The reactivation time can be set from doors are still open. the room must be kept the same.
5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited. Even if it goes against the concept of When the reactivation time is set on
When the time set has elapsed the energy saving this function is useful unlimited the function is not active.
system reactivates the temperature when the windows have been left
control zone even if windows or open and the temperature set in
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOSED OPEN LEFT OPEN
t = 5÷
time can be set

from 5 minutes
to unlimited
radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel

ON off back ON
automatically
CONTACT INTERFACE
CONFIGURATION
The contact interface is directly AUX configurator to the MOD1 the system. The coupling between
connected to the temperature and/or MOD2 housings, for the the interface contact line and the
control bus. It autonomously and activation of the operating mode temperature control zone must
independently manages the two with temperature control system be performed using the TiThermo
C1 and C2 lines. Only the line used only. Then configure the Z1/2 and application.
must be configured, and not both N1/2 housings, in order to assign the
of them. Follow by connecting the address 1 to 99 of the device, within
CONTACT INTERFACE OF ZONE 1 WINDOWS

T - C1 - C2
[Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
ART.F482
0 1 AUX - - -
T C2 C1 CONTACT INTERFACE OF ZONE 2 AND 3 WINDOWS

[Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
0 2 AUX 0 3 AUX

PROBES CONFIGURATION
-2 -1
ZONE 1 PROBE ZONE 3 PROBE
-3
OF
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA] [ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
+1
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -
ZONE 2 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 2 -
ACTUATORS CONFIGURATION
ZONE ACTUATOR
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 0 1 2 3 OFF 1
CIRCULATION PUMP ACTUATOR

C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]

0 0 1 OFF -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 2 HEATING WITH RADIANT PANELS WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT
C4 C3 C2 C1
F482 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
4692
1 2 3 4 5
C1
ART. F430/4
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
(*)
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1
-3
+1 OFF
T C2 C1
+2
+3
Actuator
ZONE 3 Actuator Probe
4692
-2 -1
(*) C2
-3
+1 OFF
+2
+3
Probe 3550
ZONE 2
E46ADCN
4692
C1 T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
OK
1 2 3
(*) -2 -1
4
7
5
8
6
9
-3
OFF
0
+1
T C2 C1
+2
+3
F482 Central unit Power supply

ZONE 2 Probe
Actuator
F422 F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to C1 C2
Actuator Actuator
ART.F422
the magnetic contacts must not exceed 50 meters. OUT
It is recommended that the balancing resistance is

installed nearby the last line contact.
3486
BUS
E46ADCN
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Central unit Power supply
Mixing valve management

central unit 4607
C1 N
M Circulation
pump
Boiler

next >>
99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

CONFIGURATION
In this case the contact interface is the function for the management When setting the parameters for
connected to the burglar-alarm bus of the magnetic contacts installed the management of the magnetic
only and communicates with the in the Burglar-Alarm system, item contacts, the TiThermo application
temperature control bus by means of 3550 must be used in the 99 zone must be used. Two parameters may
interface F422. The door or window control unit temperature control be set: the reaction time and the
opening or closing signal is sent both system. This device does not require reactivation time.
to the burglar-alarm system and to physical configurators. Configuration
the temperature control system, and operations must be performed using
is used both for safety and energy the “Configuration” menu or the
saving purposes. In order to use TiThermo application.
REACTION
TIME
OK
REACTIVATION 1
4
2
5
3
6
7 8 9
TIME 0

TiThermo screen 3550

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
<< previous
REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from frame avoiding switching the windows or doors not needed for the
0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of corresponding temperature control changes of air, for example opening a
delay to the deactivation of the zone OFF. window to close or open the shutters,
temperature control zone. During Setting 0 minutes deactivation is or opening the entrance door to
this time the system completely practically instant. This function welcome a person.
ignores the opening of the window is suitable for short openings of
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOSED OPENING CLOSING CLOSED
t = 0÷2
time can be set

from 0 to 2 minutes
radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel

ON kept ON kept ON ON
REACTIVATION TIME
The reactivation time can be set from doors are still open. the room must be kept the same.
5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited. Even if it goes against the concept of When the reactivation time is set on
When the time set has elapsed the energy saving this function is useful unlimited the function is not active.
system reactivates the temperature when the windows have been left
control zone even if windows or open and the temperature set in
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOSED OPEN LEFT OPEN
t = 5÷
time can be set

from 5 minutes
to unlimited
radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel

ON off back ON
automatically

CONTACT INTERFACE
CONFIGURATION
Then configure housings Z1/2 and
N1/2 depending on the requirements CONTACT INTERFACE OF ZONE 1 WINDOWS
[Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
and features of the burglar-alarm
(*) (*) 4 (*) (*) (*)
system (see the burglar-alarm
technical guide). The coupling CONTACT INTERFACE OF ZONE 2 AND 3 WINDOWS
between the interface contact [Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
line and the temperature control (*) (*) 4 (*) (*) (*)
zone must be performed using the
(*) NOTE: The involved contacts are C1 and C2. Only the housings of the lines used must be configured; configure
TiThermo application.
housings MOD1 and/or MOD2 based on the type of contact an the operating mode to be used. See table.
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
MOD1/MOD2 TYPE OF CONTACT AND MODE
4 NC
T C2 C1
5 Balanced
6 NC - delayed
7 NC - Balanced - delayed
-2 -1
-3
OF
+1
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -
ZONE 2 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 2 -
ZONE ACTUATOR
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 0 1 2 3 OFF 1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]

0 0 1 OFF -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Several homes, 4 zones

DIAGRAM 3 CENTRAL HEATING WITH RADIANT PANELS FOR SEVERAL HOMES
Home n
ZONE 3
-2 -1 -2 -1
ZONE 2
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
4692 4692
18.0°C
ZONE 4 -2 -1 23.7°C ZONE 1

-3
+1 OF
F 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
C OK
4692 Probe 4695 Probe
Home 2
ZONE 3 -2 -1 -2 -1
ZONE 2
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
4692 4692
18.0°C
ZONE 4 -2 -1 23.7°C ZONE 1

-3
+1 OF
F 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
C OK
4692 Probe 4695 Probe
Home 1
Central boiler

next >>
CONNECTION OF THE DISTRIBUTION COLLECTOR AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUS SYSTEM OF HOME 2
C1 C2 C3 C4
Solenoid valve Solenoid valve
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4

Meter
Mixing valve
Mixing valve
M management
central unit
4-zone
central unit
F430/2 18.0°C
23.7°C
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
1 2 3 4
C OK
E46ADCN
1 2 3 4
Main ART. F430/2
solenoid valve C1 C2
C1
L
N
ZONE 4 ZONE 3 ZONE 2

-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF +1 OF
F F F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
4692 4692 4692
The meter is used to measure the amount of heat consumed by each home.
NOTE: The temperature control BUS system, the connection of the solenoid valve, and the meter, are the same for all homes.
For the radiant panels management center connection refer to the diagram No. 21.

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Several homes, 4 zones

<< previous
CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE CONFIGURATION
18.0°C The 4 zone control unit item HD/ the system configuration operations
23.7°C
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
HC/HS4695 Axolute, L/N/NT4695 correctly. As an alternative the
C OK
LivingLight and AM5875 Màtixas TiThermo Basic application dedicated
well as managing the whole of the to this version of control unit can
temperature control system, contains be used. For these operations refer
a temperature probe which must to the manual supplied with the
be configured physically like the products.
other system probes. Interact with
the “Configure zones” menu to end
PROBES CONFIGURATION ZONE 1 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE

[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 1 -
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
ZONE 2 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 2 -
ZONE 3 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
ZONE 4 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 4 -

1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1 C2
ZONE ACTUATOR 1,2,3,4 MAIN SOLENOID VALVE ACTUATOR

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2] [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 2 1 4 1 0 0 1 OFF -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 4 HEATING WITH RADIATOR WITH 0÷10 V SOLENOID VALVE
- + - + - + - +
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 1 OUT 2
Actuator Actuator
Probe
F430V10 F430V10
0÷10
Solenoid valve ZONE 4 H/LN4691
Probe
0÷10
BUS
3550 Central unit

Probe
E46ADCN
0÷10 OK
Solenoid valve ZONE 2 H/LN4691 1 2 3

4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Probe Power supply
0÷10
L Actuator
N
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C1 C2
F430/2
Circulation
pump
Boiler
NOTA:0-10V valves are not managed in proportional mode but in ON/OFF mode; for the management of the valves in proportional mode see diagram 19.

99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT CONFIGURATION
The 99 zone control unit item 3550 application can be used. For these
does not need physical configurators operations refer to the manual
but, to end the system configuration supplied with the products.
OK operations, interact with the
1 2 3
4 5 6 “Configure zones” menu.
7 8 9
0
As an alternative the TiThermo
PROBES WITH DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

[ZA] [ZB] [TY] [H] [C] [P] [IN] [ZA] [ZB] [TY] [H] [C] [P] [IN]
0 1 0 9 9 0 0 0 3 0 9 9 0 0

0 2 0 9 9 0 0 0 4 0 9 9 0 0
ZONE ACTUATOR 1 AND 2

[ZA1] [ZB1] [N1] [ZA2] [ZB2] [N2]
0 1 1 0 2 1
ZONE ACTUATOR 3 AND 4

[ZA1] [ZB1] [N1] [ZA2] [ZB2] [N2]
0 3 1 0 4 1

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -
C1 C2

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIGRAM 5 HEATING AND COOLING WITH 4-PIPE FAN-COIL AND 0÷10V SOLENOID VALVE
Actuator
H/LN4691
Probe
F430R3V10
ZONE 4
Actuator
H/LN4691
Probe
F430R3V10
ZONE 3
Actuator
H/LN4691
BUS
Probe
F430R3V10
ZONE 2
FAN-COIL connection
Actuator
H/LN4691
3550
Probe
E46ADCN
OK
ZONE 1 F430R3V10 1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Boiler
Chiller
NOTA:0-10V valves are not managed in proportional mode but in ON/OFF mode; for the management of the valves in proportional mode see diagram 19.

“Configure zones” menu.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0

0 1 0 8 8 - - 0 3 0 8 8 - -

0 2 0 8 8 - - 0 4 0 8 8 - -
CONFIGURATION AND WIRING DIAGRAM OF THE ACTUATORS
F430R3V10
2
M 3
0÷10 4
1
M N L
0÷10
-7
+8
-5
+6
ZONE 1 ACTUATOR ZONE 3 ACTUATOR

[ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE] [ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE]
0 1 1 - 0 3 1 -

0 2 1 - 0 4 1 -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIGRAM 6 HEATING AND COOLING WITH 4-PIPE FAN-COIL
Actuator ZONE 4
H/LN4691
Probe
F430R8
Actuator ZONE 3
H/LN4691
Probe
F430R8
Actuator ZONE 2
H/LN4691
BUS
Probe
F430R8
FAN-COIL connection
Actuator ZONE 1
H/LN4691
3550
Probe
E46ADCN
OK
F430R8 1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Boiler
Chiller

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0

0 1 0 7 7 - - 0 3 0 7 7 - -

0 2 0 7 7 - - 0 4 0 7 7 - -
CONFIGURATION AND WIRING DIAGRAM OF THE ACTUATORS
F430R8
2
3
4
1
L1
N
M
5
6

0 1 1 - 0 3 1 -

0 2 1 - 0 4 1 -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 7 RADIATOR HEATING AND FAN-COIL COOLING WITH CUSTOMIZED ADJUSTMENT PROFILE
F430/2 F430/2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
C1 C2 Actuator Actuator C1 C2
BUS
BUS
Probe Probe
C2 23.7°C
18.0°C
23.7°C
18.0°C
C2
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK C OK
4695 4695
Actuator 1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 F430/4 1 2 3 4 5
Actuator
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
Probe Probe
C1 23.7°C
18.0°C
23.7°C
18.0°C
C1
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK C OK
4695 4695
Actuator F430/4 F430/4 Actuator

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Power supply
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
E46ADCN
C2
F430/2
C1 Actuator
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
Circulation C1 C2
CHILLER pump
RISCALDAMENTO
Boiler

next >>
HEATING
correlation between the actuator the contacts C1 and C2 configured
Wiring diagram for connection of
contact and the address of the zone with ZA = 1, ZBI = 1
the solenoid valve to the actuator
to be controlled. In this example, the and ZB2 = 5.
for heating. The configuration must
radiators in zone 1 are controlled by
be made correctly, maintaining the
F430/2
C1
ZONE 1 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
L
C2
ZONE 1
N
COOLING
Wiring diagram for connecting the fan- to zone 2, replicate the same as shown in the configuration tables.
coil actuator for cooling the zone 1. connection, correctly configuring the
To control the fan-coils belonging actuator corresponding to the zone
ZONE 1 C4 F430/4
C3 1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C2
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1= fan-coil solenoid valve
C1 C2= minimum ventilation speed
C3= average ventilation speed
M C4= maximum ventilation speed
N L
CIRCULATION PUMPS
Wiring diagram for connecting
COOLING CIRCULATION the circulation pumps to the
F430/2
PUMP corresponding actuator.
1 2 3 4
C2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 The pumps of the two systems,

HEATING CIRCULATION
C1 C2
heating and cooling, are controlled
PUMP
by a single actuator.
C1
L N

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
<< previous
18.0°C The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ the system configuration operations
23.7°C
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875 as correctly. As an alternative the
C OK
well as managing the whole of the TiThermo Basic application dedicated
temperature control system, contains to this version of control unit can
a temperature probe which must be used. For these operations refer
be configured physically like the to the manual supplied with the
other system probes. Interact with products.
1^ ZONE 1 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE 1^ ZONE 2 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE

1 1 - 2 1 -
2^ ZONE 1 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE 2^ ZONE 2 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE

1 5 - 2 5 -
HEATING SYSTEM ACTUATOR CONFIGURATION
1 2 3 4
ZONE 1 ACTUATOR
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]

1 1 1 5 1
C1 C2
ZONE 2 ACTUATOR
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
2 1 1 5 1

HEATING/COOLING FAN-COIL ACTUATORS CONFIGURATION
ZONE 1 COOLING ACTUATOR ZONE 2 COOLING ACTUATOR

1 2 3 4 5
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N] [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
C1 C2 C3 C4

1 5 5 5 5 2 2 5 5 5 5 2
CIRCULATION PUMP ACTUATOR CONFIGURATION

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
0 0 1 0 2
C1 C2

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 8 HEATING WITH RADIATORS
C4 C3 C2 C1
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
Actuator
Probe
C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 4 -2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
Solenoid valve
4692
Probe
ZONE 3 -2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
Solenoid valve
4692
BUS
Probe
ZONE 2
E46ADCN
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
Solenoid valve
4692
Probe
Power supply
18.0°C
23.7°C
ZONE 1 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
Solenoid valve
4695
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Actuator
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
F430/2
L
N
C1
Circulation
pump
Boiler

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ correctly. As an alternative the
18.0°C
23.7 °C
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875 as TiThermo Basic application dedicated
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK

the system configuration operations
ZONE 1 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE

[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 1 -
ZONE 2 PROBE
-2 -1
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 -
ZONE 3 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
ZONE 4 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 4 -
ZONE ACTUATOR
1
1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 0 1 2 3 4 1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 9 HEATING WITH RADIANT PANELS
C4 C3 C2 C1
Probe
-2 -1
1 2 3 4 5
-3
Actuator
+1 OF 1 2 3 4 5
F
+2
+3
ART. F430/4
ZONE 4
C1 C2 C3 C4
4692
F430/4
Probe
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
ZONE 3
4692
BUS
Probe
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
ZONE 2 E46ADCN
4692
Power supply
Probe 18.0°C
23.7°C
ZONE 1
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
4695
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
Actuator
C1 C2

central unit F430/2
L
C1 N
M Circulation
pump
Boiler
Distribution collector with
solenoid valves

CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE
CONFIGURATION
The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ correctly. As an alternative the
18.0°C
23.7 °C
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875 as TiThermo Basic application dedicated
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK

the system configuration operations
ZONE 1 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE

[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 1 -
ZONE 2 PROBE
-2 -1
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 -
ZONE 3 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
ZONE 4 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 4 -
ZONE ACTUATOR
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5 1 2 3 4 [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 0 1 2 3 4 1

C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 10 HEATING WITH RADIANT PANELS AND HEATING UNITS
C1 C2 C3 C4
Actuator
ZONE 1 4695 1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
ART. F430/4
18.0°C
23.7°C
C1 C2 C3 C4
13
38
: Ven 07 Gen
C OK
Probe
F430/4
ZONE 2 4692
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
Probe
BUS
4692
ZONE 3
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
E46ADCN
F
+2
+3
Probe
ZONE 4 4692
Power supply
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
Probe
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Actuator ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2

Actuator
C1 C2 C1 C2

central unit
F430/2 F430/2
L
C2 C1
N
Heating units distribution
collector
M
Circulation
pump
Boiler
Distribution collector with
solenoid valves
C1 C2

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ TiThermo Basic application dedicated
18.0°C
23.7°C HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875 as to this version of control unit can
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
well as managing the whole of the be used. For these operations refer
C OK
temperature control system, contains to the manual supplied with the

a temperature probe which must products.
be configured physically like the
the “Configure zones” menu to end ZONE 1 CENTRAL UNIT/PROBE
the system configuration operations [ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
correctly. As an alternative the 0 1 -

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 - 0 4 -
ZONE 3 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C1 C2
ZONE ACTUATOR CIRCULATION PUMP ACTUATOR HEATING UNITS ACTUATOR

[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N] [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2] [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 1 2 3 4 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 2 2 4 2

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa - Climaveneta fan-coil

DIAGRAM 11 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
(*) ZONE 4 (*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL
Probe during manufacturing, and is already connected to the
FAN-COIL itself through the collector found at the top on
-2 -1
the front. Therefore, once the hydraulic connection has
-3
+1 OF
4692FAN been completed, all that is needed is to connect the BUS.

F
+2
+3
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 3
Probe
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
4692FAN
+2
+3
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 2
Probe
-2 -1
BUS
-3
+1 OF
F
4692FAN
+2
+3
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 1 FAN-COIL connection
Probe
-2 -1
3550
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY E46ADCN
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
GATEWAY
CHILLER

operations, interact with the
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9 As an alternative the TiThermo
0
CONFIGURATION OF PROBES FOR FAN-COIL

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -

0 2 - 0 4 -
HEATING AND COOLING

WITH CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
Electric diagram and configuration ensuring correct configuration of
of the GATEWAY installed inside the the actuator for the specific zone, as
Climaveneta fan-coil for the heating- shown in the configuration tables.
cooling of zone 2. In order to control
the fan-coils of all other zones,
perform the same type of connection,
ZONE 1 GATEWAY ZONE 3 GATEWAY
Gateway [ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE] [ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE]
M
0 1 1 0 0 3 1 0

BUS 0 2 1 0 0 4 1 0
CLIMAVENETA CHILLER Wiring diagram and configuration chiller. A single chiller serves a system
of the gateway which controls the which can work both as heating
and as cooling. The GATEWAY is
connected to the CLIMAVENETA
chiller through the collector found at
CHILLER the top on the front, and to the BUS
CLIMAVENETA through the draw-out connection

terminal.
Gateway GATEWAY CHILLER

[ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE]
BUS 0 0 1 1

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 12 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA AIR CONDITIONING AND COMBINATION
BOILER
(*) ZONE 4 FAN-COIL connection
Probe
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
ZONE 3
(*)
Probe
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
(*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL during
manufacturing, and is already connected to the FAN-COIL itself
ZONE 2 through the collector found at the top on the front. Therefore,
(*) once the hydraulic connection has been completed, all that is
Probe needed is to connect the BUS.
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
3550
ZONE 1 E46ADCN
(*) OK
Probe 1 2 3
-2 -1 4 5 6
-3
+1 OF 7 8 9
F
+2
+3
4692FAN Central unit Power supply

GATEWAY
F430/2 GATEWAY
C2 C1
ART. F430/2
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
Combination boiler
3-way
solenoid valve
CHILLER

next >>
HEATING AND COOLING WITH

FAN-COIL CLIMAVENETA
Electric diagram and configuration corresponding to the zone as
of the GATEWAY installed inside the indicated in the configuration tables
heating/cooling Climaveneta fan-coil. of the following pages.
Correctly configures the gateway
GATEWAY
M
BUS
CLIMAVENETA CHILLER
Wiring diagram of the gateway which need to install radio probe item 3455 front, and to the BUS through the
controls the chiller. with its interface. The temperature draw-out connection terminal.
A single chiller serves a system datum is made available to the
which can work both as heating and MyHOME temperature control
as cooling. The attached outside system by means of the gateway.
temperature probe is a device The Gateway is connected to the
normally present in a Climaveneta CLIMAVENETA chiller through the
system of this type. There is thus no collector found at the top on the
CHILLER
5° C
CLIMAVENETA
GATEWAY
BUS

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4 zone villa
<< previous
DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION
This diagram represents an example means of TiThermo: for example if 5 below 5°C; at this point the Boiler
of a heating and cooling system °C is set. When the OT is greater than starts to work. It will stay on until the
made with Climaveneta unit and 5 °C the system is managed by the OT rises above 7°C, when the Chiller
Combination boiler. Chiller. switches on again.
By means of the TiThermo software When OT is lower than 5°C the
the 99 zone control unit item 3550 following actions take place: Chiller NOTE: for the TiThermo software setting details
can be programmed to use the OFF, Boiler ON and valve open consult the documentation supplied with the product
reading of the outside temperature towards the Boiler. itself.
from the Climaveneta system to The Boiler continues to work until OT
manage systems with combination rises above a value higher than 5°C.
boilers. This selection is made to avoid device
Depending on the outside state oscillation phenomena.
temperature the control unit If for example 7°C is set as threshold
activates the most suitable and value, when OT is higher than 7°C the
convenient heating system following actions take place: Chiller
depending on the heat yield. ON, Boiler OFF, valve open towards
During the spring and autumn the Chiller. To sum up, the Chiller
rooms can be heated using the continues to work until the OT drops
heat generated by the Chiller. This
heat is however not sufficient in the
winter when a Combination boiler, TiThermo: example of an application window, indispensable for programming
generally supplied by gas, must be and setting the temperature thresholds and the automations.
used. The MyHOME temperature
control system switches between
the two sources of heat, using the
outside temperature as parameter
to discriminate between spring and
autumn and winter. Actuator F430/2
manages the switching ON or OFF
of the Boiler and changes the valve
state, while the Gateway manages
the Climaveneta Chiller.
In the example given here the Chiller
continues to work as long as the
outside temperature (measured
by the Climaveneta outside
probe) remains higher than a set
threshold value; below this value the
Combination boiler starts to work.
The Outside Temperature (OT) under
which the boiler will operate is set by

The 99 zone control unit item 3350 not need physical configurators but,
must be used to manage systems to end the system configuration
with combination boiler. The function operations, interact with the
is not in fact available on the 4 zone “Configure zones” menu and with
OK
1 2 3
control unit item HC/HS/L/N/NT4695 TiThermo applications.
4 5 6
7 8
0
9 and item AM5875. This device does For these operations refer to the
manual supplied with the products.

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -

0 2 - 0 4 -
GATEWAY FAN-COIL CONFIGURATION

0 1 1 0 0 3 1 0

0 2 1 0 0 4 1 0
GATEWAY CHILLER CONFIGURATION
GATEWAY CHILLER
6° C
[ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE]
0 0 1 1
BOILER AND SOLENOID VALVE ACTUATOR CONFIGURATION
BOILER/SOLENOID VALVE ACTUATOR

1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4 [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
ART. F430/2
0 5 1 6 1
C1 C2
RISCALDAMENTO

WIRING DIAGRAMS
6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 13 HEATING WITH RADIANT PANELS
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Actuator Actuator
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
ZONE 4 ZONE 3
BUS
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
ZONE 5 ZONE 2
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
ZONE 6 ZONE 1
3550
F430/2 F430/2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2

E46ADCN
C1 C2 C1 C2
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Actuator Actuator
Power supply
Mixing valve management Mixing valve management

central unit central unit
C1 C2
M Secondary circulation pumps M
C1
Main circulation
pump
L
Boiler
N
does not need physical configurators operations refer to the manual
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9 As an alternative the TiThermo

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 4 -

0 2 - 0 5 -

0 3 - 0 6 -
ZONE ACTUATOR 1, 2, 3
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 0 1 2 3 OFF 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]

0 4 5 6 OFF 1
MAIN CIRCULATION PUMP ACTUATOR

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -
SECONDARY CIRCULATION PUMP

ACTUATOR
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 2 1 3 1

WIRING DIAGRAMS
6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 14 RADIANT PANELS HEATING AND COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFIER FAN-COIL
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Actuator Actuator
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 4 ZONE 3
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
ZONE 5 ZONE 2
4692 BUS 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
Probe Probe
Humidistat 1* ZONE 6 ZONE 1 Humidistat 1*
3550 Actuator Actuator

F430/2 F430/2
E46ADCN
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
OK
C1 C2 C1 C2
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Mixing valve management 1* Mixing valve management

central unit central unit
M C1 C2 M
Secondary Secondary
circulation circulation
pump C1 C2 pump
1*
L
Main circulation
pump
Chiller
N
NOTE: 1* the dehumidifier system is not managed through the MyHOME system. It is possible to centralize the management of humidity probes using the integration solution
with Driver manager Item F459. For a description of the device refer to the "Functions integration and control" section.
For the radiant panels management center connection refer to the diagram No. 21.
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 4 -

0 2 - 0 5 -

0 3 - 0 6 -
1 2 3 4 5
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2

0 1 2 3 OFF 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 ZONE ACTUATOR 4, 5, 6
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
0 4 5 6 OFF 1
MAIN CIRCULATION PUMP ACTUATOR

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -
SECONDARY CIRCULATION PUMP

ACTUATOR
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 2 0 3

WIRING DIAGRAMS
8 zone villa
DIAGRAM 15 HEATING WITH RADIATORS AND FAN-COIL COOLING
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Actuator Actuator
BUS
4692 4692
C4 Probe -2 -1 -2 -1
Probe C4
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Actuator Actuator
ZONE 7 ZONE 8
4692 4692
C3 Probe -2 -1 -2 -1
Probe C3
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Actuator Actuator
ZONE 5 ZONE 6
4692 4692
C2 Probe -2 -1 -2 -1 Probe C2
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Actuator Actuator
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
4692 4692
C1 Probe -2 -1 -2 -1
Probe C1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
F430/4 F430/4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
ART. F430/4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4
ART. F430/4
5
3550
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
E46ADCN
Actuator Actuator
OK
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 1
4
2
5
3
6
7 8 9
0
C2 Actuator
C1 F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
Circulation C1 C2
CHILLER pump
RISCALDAMENTO
Boiler

next >>
HEATING
valves and the corresponding and the address of the zone to be
Wiring diagram for connecting the
actuator. controlled. In the example given here,
solenoid valves of zones 2, 4, 6 and
The configuration must be made zone 2 is controlled by contact C1
8 to the heating actuator. To control
correctly, maintaining the correlation configured with ZA = 0 and ZB = 2.
zones 1, 3, 5 and 7 replicate the same
between the actuator contact
connection between the solenoid
C4 F430/4
C3 1 2 3 4 5
ZONE 8 ZONE 6 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C2
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1
ZONE 2 L
ZONE 4
N
COOLING
Wiring diagram for connecting the fan- to zones 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 8 corresponding to the zone as
coil actuator for cooling the zone 6. replicate the same connection, indicated in the configuration tables.
To control the fan-coils belonging correctly configuring the actuator
ZONE 6 C4 F430/4
C3 1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C2
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1 C2= minimum ventilation speed
N L
CIRCULATION PUMPS
Wiring diagram for connecting
COOLING CIRCULATION the circulation pumps to the
F430/2
PUMP corresponding actuator.
1 2 3 4
C2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 The pumps of the two systems,

HEATING CIRCULATION
C1 C2
heating and cooling, are controlled
PUMP
by a single actuator.
C1
L N

WIRING DIAGRAMS
8 zone villa
<< previous

OK

4 5 6
7 8
0
9

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 5 -

0 2 - 0 6 -

0 3 - 0 7 -

0 4 - 0 8 -
HEATING SYSTEM ACTUATOR CONFIGURATION
ZONE 1, 3, 5 AND 7 ACTUATOR

1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
ART. F430/4
0 1 3 5 7 1
C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 2, 4, 6 AND 8 ACTUATOR

[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
0 2 4 6 8 1

COOLING SYSTEM ACTUATOR CONFIGURATION

1 2 3 4 5 [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N] [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 0 1 1 1 1 2 0 5 5 5 5 2
C1 C2 C3 C4
0 2 2 2 2 2 0 6 6 6 6 2

0 3 3 3 3 2 0 7 7 7 7 2

0 4 4 4 4 2 0 8 8 8 8 2

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
0 0 1 0 2
C1 C2

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector, 12 zones

DIAGRAM 16 2 PIPE, 3 SPEED FAN-COIL, SINGLE HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM
BUS
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF +1 OF
1 2 3 4 5 F F F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
Probe Probe Probe

ZONE 10 ZONE 11 ZONE 12
C1 C2 C3 C4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
Actuator
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 Actuator
Actuator
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
1 2 3 4 5 +1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 7 Probe ZONE 8 Probe ZONE 9 Probe
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
Actuator
ART. F430/4
Actuator
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
1 2 3 4 5 +1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+2
+2
+2
1 2 3 4 5
+3
+3
+3
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5 Actuator
ART. F430/4
Actuator
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
1 2 3 4 5 +1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
1 2 3 4 5
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5 Actuator
ART. F430/4
Actuator
Circulation pump
3550 1 2 3 4
C1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
E46ADCN
C1 C2
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Actuator
0
CHILLER

next >>
HEATING AND COOLING

Wiring diagram for connecting the connection, correctly configuring
fan-coil to the actuator for zone 12 the actuator corresponding to the
heating/cooling. zone as indicated in the configuration
To control the fan-coils belonging to tables.
all the other zones replicate the same
ZONE 12 C4
F430/4
C3 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C2
ART. F430/4

C1 C2 C3 C4
C2= minimum ventilation speed
C1
N L
CIRCULATION PUMP
Wiring diagram for connecting heating and cooling is controlled by a
the circulation pumps to the single pump.
corresponding actuator.
A system which can provide both
F430/2
C2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
SINGLE CIRCULATION
C1 C2
C1 PUMP
L N

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector, 12 zones

<< previous

OK

4 5 6
7 8
0
9

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 7 -

0 2 - 0 8 -

0 3 - 0 9 -

0 4 - 1 0 -

0 5 - 1 1 -

0 6 - 1 2 -

HEATING/COOLING FAN-COIL ACTUATORS CONFIGURATION

1 2 3 4 5 [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N] [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 7 7 7 7 1
C1 C2 C3 C4
0 2 2 2 2 1 0 8 8 8 8 1

0 3 3 3 3 1 0 9 9 9 9 1

0 4 4 4 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 6 6 6 6 1 1 2 2 2 2 1

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
0 0 1 OFF -
C1 C2

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 17 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION WITH HEATING RADIANT PANEL AND
COOLING SYSTEMS VRV BY DAIKIN (IP PROTOCOL )
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
Outdoor unit
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
VRV - Daikin C1 C2 C3 C4
C1 C2 C3 C4
Zone 3
H/LN4691
Indoor unit VRV MODE
Dill-Net
FAN
Zone 2
H/LN4691
Indoor unit VRV
MODE
Dill-Net FAN
Zone 1
H/LN4691
Indoor unit VRV
MODE
Dill-Net FAN
3550
C1
Intelligent F430/2
Touch Controller 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
E46ADCN
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
Dill-Net
7 8 9
0
SCS
LAN
Switch
Ethernet
Mixing
valve
C1
LAN M
Driver
manager
F459
ETHERNET
SCS AI SCS AV
SCS
L
N
The system is managed by the local sensors and the MyHome central unit; no local Daikin controller must be installed.

6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 18 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION WITH HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
WITH RADIANT PANELS HITACHI (MODBUS PROTOCOL)
HITACHI
Zone 6 H/LN4691
Indoor unit
MODE
FAN
HITACHI RAS Mono and RAM Multi residential

Zone 5 H/LN4691 outdoor unit
Indoor unit
MODE
MyHOME_Screen
+
FAN
MH4892-4893
Zone 4 H/LN4691
Indoor unit
MODE
FAN
Zone 3 H/LN4691
Indoor unit
MODE
+
3550
–
FAN
Zone 2 H/LN4691
Indoor unit
MODE
+ OK
–
FAN
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 E46ADCN
Zone 1 H/LN4691
Indoor unit
MODE
FAN 230 Vac

SCS
HITACHI
HC-A8MB
HC-A64MB
LAN LAN
The following devices may be used alternatively to

the interfaces HC-A8MB or HC-A64MB: Driver manager
F459
Switch
ETHERNET
Ethernet
+
SCS AI SCS AV
PSC-A160WEB1 CSNET Manager + HC-A64NET

SCS
The system is managed by the local sensors and the MyHome central unit; no local controller must be installed.

WIRING DIAGRAMS
6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 19 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION WITH FANCOIL SYSTEM WITH
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL 0-10V
Zone 6 OUT 1 OUT 2 C1 H/LN4691

Indoor unit 1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4
ART. F430/2
MODE
C1 C2 +
FAN
F430V10 Actuator F430/2 (*) Outdoor unit
Zone 5 OUT 1 OUT 2 C1 H/LN4691

Indoor unit 1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4
ART. F430/2
MODE
C1 C2
+
FAN
F430V10 Actuator F430/2 (*) MyHOME_Screen

MH4892-4893
Zone 4 OUT 1 OUT 2 C1

H/LN4691
Indoor unit 1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4
ART. F430/2
MODE
C1 C2
+
FAN
F430V10 Actuator F430/2 (*)

H/LN4691
Indoor unit 1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4
ART. F430/2
MODE
C1 C2
+
FAN
3550

H/LN4691
Indoor unit 1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4
ART. F430/2
MODE OK
C1 C2
+
– 1 2 3
FAN 4 5 6
7 8 9
F430V10 Actuator F430/2 (*) 0
E46ADCN

H/LN4691
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 MODE
C1 C2
+
–
230 Vac
FAN

SCS
The system is managed by the local sensors and the MyHome central unit; no
local controller must be installed. Driver manager
ETHERNET
F459
SCS AI SCS AV
Note (**): actuator for management of solenoid valve(s) SCS

4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 20 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION WITH HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
WITH RADIANT PANELS REHAU.
C1 C2 C3 C4
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
Radiant
ART. F430/4
head control
C1 C2 C3 C4
actuator
Meter
Mixing valve
M management
central control
unit
3550
RH% PROBES
UR% UR%
F430/2 OK
Pump 1 2 3
4 5 6
actuator 1 2 3 4
7 8 9
CIRCULATING
1 2 3 4
0
ART. F430/2
E46ADCN
PUMP CONSENT C1 C2
C1
3477
A
DEHUMIDIFICATION
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
CONTACT
PL1 PL2 C
SUMMER/WINTER Contact interface L

SWITCHOVER N
Rehau central
F430/2 Zone 4 Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1
control unit
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
1 2 3 4
Actuator
-3
-3
-3
-3
1 2 3 4
+1 OF +1 OF +1 OF +1 OF
F F F F
+2
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
+3
ART. F430/2
E/I
C1 C1 C2
4692 4692 4692 4692
C2
NOTE: the diagram refers to the Rehau system but is applicable (subject to verification) also to similar central units of other manufacturers. For more details contact BTicino sales
force.

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 21 - HEATING PLUS COOLING SCHEDULED BY BACNET CONTROLLER (AUTO-CHANGEOVER)
BacNET IP NETWORK ETHERNET
Gateway
F450
SCS AI SCS AV
Probe
Zone 1
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692
BUS
MyHOME_Screen 10
BUS HVAC
Probe
Power supply
Zone 2
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692
Gateway
BacNET
E46ADCN
Probe
MODE
Zone 3 +
FAN BUS MyHOME

H/LN4691

WORKING MODE:
This configuration is suitable if is The control of the temperature from of the temperature control.
demanded an indivdual management touch screens is possbile thorugh Temperature schedule managed by
of the zones about the passage from dedicated Bacnet pages. Bacnet controller.
heating and cooling. No integration in MyHOME scenario
CONFIGURATION NOTES:
Probes must be configured with gateway mode. in stand-alone modes and with heating
heating and cooling loads in Display thermostat must be configured and cooling loads in gateway mode.
ZONE 1 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [TY] [H] [C] [P] [IN]
0 1 0 7 1 4 4

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 - 0 3 -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 22 - HEATING PLUS COOLING MANAGED BY BACNET (MYHOME CENTRAL UNIT AS A SCHEDULER)
BacNET IP NETWORK
Gateway ETHERNET
F450
MyHOME_Screen 10
SCS AI SCS AV
Probe
Zone 1
-2 -1
Central unit
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692
BUS HVAC
BUS
Probe OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
Zone 2
-2 -1
7 8 9
-3
+1 OF
F
0
+2
+3
Power supply 3550

4692
Gateway
BacNET
Probe
MODE
E46ADCN
Zone 3 +
FAN BUS MyHOME

H/LN4691

WORKING MODE:
Heating/cooling: This configuration temperature from touch screens is scenario of the temprature control.
is suitable if is demanded an central possbile thorugh standard MyHOME Scheduling: Temperature schedule
management of the zones about the temperature control pages or managed by central unit.
passage from heating and cooling. dedicated Bacnet pages.
Touch screen: The control of the Scenario: full integration in MyHOME
Probes must be configured with gateway mode. Display thermostat and with heating and cooling loads
heating and cooling loads in must be configured master modes in gateway mode.

OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
ZONE 1 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [TY] [H] [C] [P] [IN]
0 1 0 4 4 - -

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 - 0 3 -

WIRING DIAGRAMS
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 23 - HEATING MANAGED BY MYHOME, COOLING MANAGED BY BACNET (MYHOME CENTRAL UNIT
MANAGES HEATING AND COOLING PROFILES; NO AUTO-CHANGEOVER)
Actuator
F430/4 1
1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1 C2 C3 C4
Zone 3
Probe
Indoor unit -2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692
Zone 2
BUS HVAC
Probe
Indoor unit
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692
Zone 1
Probe
Indoor unit MODE
FAN
H/LN4691
Central unit
Gateway 3550 C1
BacNET Actuator
1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4 F430/2
E46ADCN
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
SCS
BacNET IP NETWORK
Mixing
valve
MyHOME_Screen 10 C1
Gateway
ETHERNET
F450
SCS AI SCS AV
SCS
L
BUS MyHOME N

WORKING MODE:
Heating/cooling: This configuration temperature from touch screens is scenario of the temprature control.
is suitable if is demanded an central possbile thorugh standard MyHOME Scheduling: Temperature schedule
management of the zones about the temperature control pages or managed by central unit.
passage from heating and cooling. dedicated Bacnet pages.
Touch screen: The control of the Scenario: full integration in MyHOME
Probes must be configured with cooling loads in gateway mode. heating loads in standard MyHOME
heating loads in standard MyHOME Display thermostat must be loads (ON-OFF, fan coil,…) and
loads (ON-OFF, fan coil,…) and configured master mode and with cooling loads in gateway mode.

OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
ZONE 1 PROBE
[ZA] [ZB] [TY] [H] [C] [P] [IN]
0 1 0 4 4 - -

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 - 0 3 -
ZONE ACTUATOR
1 2 3 4 5
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2

0 1 2 3 - 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 CIRCULATION PUMP ACTUATOR

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -

CONFIGURATION
General concepts
CONFIGURATION OF THE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

FUNCTIONS It is possible to select two methods:
For the probes is necessary to define Virtual configuration with

the "master" or "slave" operation. MyHOME_Suite application,
In the physical configuration this is using a PC connected to the
obtained by inserting the numeric system through web server F454
configurators in the SLA and MOD or the kit 3504. For the sensors
position. and actuators it will be possible to
For the actuators it is necessary to set configure the addresses and all the
the type of load to manage (pumps, parameters that define the type of
valves, etc.). system. In the central unit only the
For the central units it is necessary temperatures and the user profile
to configure the type of system, in will be configured.
particular: Physical configuration by

a) the zones of the system and
connecting the configurators
their name (item 3501/...) identified by
b) the functioning mode of the
number, letter, color or graphic.
actuators (heating, cooling, etc.) to the appropriate socket of each
c) the type of load to be controlled
device. With this method the
(solenoid valves, fan-coils, etc.) addresses and operating modes of
d) the pumps in the system
the probes and actuators will be
e) the control mode of the pumps configured.
(heating, cooling, etc.) Instead the central unit
f ) the delayed start-up of the
configuration must be carried
pumps (if necessary). out manually using a special
programming menu and the
central unit keypad or using the
MyHOME_Suite application. In
both cases it is necessary to set
all the parameters that define
the type of system (actuators
operating mode, type of pumps,
etc.).

The Temperature control system Two parameters are assigned with
must be appropriately configured so the configuration:
that it can work properly and so that system devices address;

each item can perform the specific function carried out.

function.
DEVICES ADDRESS
Except for the central unit, both the obtained by inserting the numeric
probes and the actuators must have configurators from 0 to 9 in the
assigned an address that defines the appropriate positions ZA and ZB in
belonging zone. the back of the devices. it is possible
In the physical configuration that is to define up to 99 zones.
“Master” and “slave” mode

For each zone address it is possible adjustment knob). This particular To each "master" probe it is possible
to have a single probe or a "master" configuration is used to measure the to associate up to 8 "slave" probes.
probe and one or more associated temperature in multiple locations of a
standard "slave" probes (without specific zone.
PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE

-3
-2 MASTER SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2 SLAVE 3
-1
+1 OFF
+2
+3
ROOM t= 17°C ROOM t= 19°C ROOM t= 21°C ROOM t= 20°C
AVERAGE t = 19.25°C
Progressive zone number N of the

actuators
This parameter defines the number
of actuators (up to 9) that can be
associated with a specific zone.

CONFIGURATION
General concepts
The probe which controls zone 1 is combined in the 4 zone control unit.
ZONE 4
ZONE 3
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
23.7°C
18.0°C
ZA = 0 -2 -1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1 ZB = 2
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
4 zone central unit

ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0
18.0°C
1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 2 1 2 3 4
ZB = 2 1 2 3 4
ZB = 2
23.7°C 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =3
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =3
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
C OK
1 ÷ 9 max 1 ÷ 9 max
BUS
The temperature control function can manage up to 99 zone addresses. For each zone up to 9 addresses dedicated to the actuators can be managed.
ZONE ... ZONE 99
ZONE 2 -2 -1
ZA = 9
ZB = 9
-3
ZONE 1
+1 OF
F
+2
+3

-2 -1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
ZA = 9 ZA = 9 ZA = 9
1 2 3 4
ZB = 9 1 2 3 4
ZB = 9 1 2 3 4
ZB = 9
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 N =1 ART. F430/2 N =2 ART. F430/2 N =3
ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1
N =1 N =2 N =3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
OK
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
1 2 3 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 1 ÷ 9 max
1 ÷ 9 max
BUS

CONTENTS
MyHOME – Energy consumption display
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

GENERAL FEATURES
Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data
Using MyHOME measurement It is also possible to display the logger.

devices it is possible to display on energy produced on site from solar By setting a indicative rate value, it is
different user interfaces (e.g. Local thermal and photovoltaic systems. also possible to obtain a quantitative
Display, MyHOME_Screen 3.5, Through graphic representations assessment of the economic cost.
MyHOME_Screen 10, Basic energy and tables, the data can be easily
display, PC, smartphone) electricity, displayed on the Touch Screen and
water and gas consumption, and on the pages of the Energy data
the data of the heating accounting
system.
Dedicated icon on the screen

of the Touch Screen

Energy selection screen Power consumption screen (instanta-
neous / cumulative)
Monthly power consumption graph Daily power consumption graph

GENERAL FEATURES
Displaying consumptions and the production data
The devices for the display of the Touch Screen, Energy Data Logger, the heating accounting system.
consumptions can be integrated Webserver). In the presence of a photovoltaic
directly on the BUS of the Thanks to the use of pulse counter system and a solar thermal system,
Automation/Temperature control interfaces and BUS meters with it is also possible to determine how
system, or be part of a dedicated inputs for toroids, with the MyHOME much electricity is produced and how
BUS system, as shown in the diagram consumption display system it is much water is heated.
below. In this it is necessary to be possible to display on the interfaces
provided with a power supply and an the consumptions for electricity, gas,
interface display (e.g. Local Display, and water, as well as the data from
MyHOME_Screen 3.5
Compact power Electricity

supply meter
Pulse counter Pulse counter

interface interface
Local Display
Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output

Photovoltaic Solar thermal
panel panel
Hot water meter

Inverter LAN network with pulse output
Electricity
meter Energy
Data Logger
Pulse counter
interface
Basic energy display

GENERAL FEATURES
Measurement and display devices
INTERFACE BUS METER WITH 3 INPUTS

INTERFACE 3522N FOR TOROIDS F520
The device detects, counts, and The device measures up to three
processes the information (water, separate circuits, by connecting up The described functions are also valid
gas, etc.) received from meters to three toroids to the appropriate to save the data coming from solar
with pulse outputs; the data is then inputs. thermal and photovoltaic systems.
made available to the SCS bus, and The data is displayed on the Touch The device is supplied with 1 toroid
displayed on the Touch Screens. The Screens through the SCS Bus. The and corresponding connection
processing and processing and accounting functions cable (item 3523); it is suitable for
accounting functions are: are: installation inside distribution boards
instantaneous consumption
instantaneous consumption of 3
and switchboards and requires the
(calculated as the average of 2 lines maximum; space of 1 DIN module.
pulses received during the time cumulative hourly consumptions

unit); for the last 12 months, daily
hourly, daily, and monthly
consumptions for the last 2 years,
consumption (one year memory). monthly consumptions for the last
The device may be installed in flush 12 years.
mounted boxes, behind traditional
type devices, or also inside
Bus meter
distribution boards, but without
with three inputs for toroids
taking up any DIN rail space.
Data deletion
pushbutton
Pulse counter interface
230 Vac
connection
SCS/BUS Hall
connection Pulses
Device
Configurators Opto isolated status LED
sockets repetition (pulse
input)
SCS/BUS
Toroid with
connection
connection cable
Configurator
socket door
DISPLAY DEVICES SYSTEM INTERFACES controlled loads, reactivating a load
MyHOME offers several user Local display, MyHOME_Screen 3,5 disabled by the Central unit for load
interfaces for the display of and MyHOME_Screen 10 are devices management, or preventively force
consumption/production data: usually used to control MyHOME the load.
System interfaces: (Local Display,
functions, but they can be used to The MyHOME_Screen 3.5
MyHOME_Screen 3.5 e MyHOME_ display their energy consumption and MyHOME_Screen 10 can also
Screen 10) and control loads. The Local Display be used to display consumption
Energy data logger
can in fact be used to display and production data for the last 12
consumption and production data years, in chart or table format (hourly,
Portal
for several energies. IT is possible to daily, or monthly representation).
Each interface is capable of meeting manage up to 10 lines, displaying Through all the previous interfaces it
several needs. on each line the instantaneous, is also possible to associate different
cumulative daily, monthly, and units (m3, l, kWh, etc.) to the single
annual consumptions, including the line/pulse counter interface and
Local Display corresponding economic values. equivalent currency (Euro, $, £, etc.)
It is also possible to operate the
MyHOME_Screen 10
MyHOME_Screen 3.5
The energy base display is equipped value of instant consumption and

general information (errors of the

with a 1.6" display for displaying cumulative consumption of the device, self-learning in progress,
the energy consumption data day / month / year; etc ..);
(detected by the energy measuring status of the load control system
management of a threshold set by
devices) and for the control of actuator and controlled power the menu of the device.
actuators belonging to the Energy value;
management system. monitored line identification;

The information that can be type of measured energy

displayed is the following: (electricity, heating, cooling, water);

GENERAL FEATURES
Measurement and display devices

ENERGY DATA LOGGER
Is a device that allows to: It is also possible to view virtual consumption details for each
Display on the PC or other device lines with data corresponding individual line are saved daily
(e.g. Smartphone) consumption/ to the addition or subtraction of
production data, recalling the web different energy lines as well as
pages using an Internet Browser multiplication by a configurable
or by OPEN controls and APP factor.
specifications. Having a detailed record of the

Display for each individual electric data in the electrical field: for each
line or pulse counter interface the individual electric line, the user can
instantaneous consumption, the download the data in an excel file
Ethernet cable
daily consumption, the monthly every 15 minutes. connection
consumption, the average daily Set several time bands for a

consumption for each month, the more detailed conversion of
total consumption for the last 12 the electric power value into an
Power line/device
years, in a chart or table format. economic value (e.g. Two-hourly, status LED
Concentrate and save data of
three-hourly tariff...). For water Button
maximum 10 separate energy lines and gas lines there are monetary
(corresponding to physical and conversion values without time SD memory card
housing door
virtual lines). The lines can be the bands (single one-hour tariff )
electric power lines, by connecting Export the data for each line/pulse

F520 meters, or an F521 Central counter interface in individual
unit for load management, excel files split by day, month, year.
or lines for water, gas, or heat Have a simple data backup: the

consumption, by connecting device features a housing for SCS/BUS
3522N pulse counter interfaces. an SD memory card, on which connection

Consumptions displaying through MyHOME_Web portal
MyHOME_Web is a virtual platform Display the consumption/

Exporting an excel file, after

that can be used to control all production data. choosing the time period for
the MyHOME functions relating The MyHOME_Web portal is
which to obtain the data. The
to comfort, safety, savings, and capable of saving the electric export file generated contains
communication in your own home. consumption data on an hourly the consumption data and the
basis and, thanks to the time corresponding economic values.
All functions performed by the bands settings, convert the energy
service are described in the chapter value into economic value. For
"System integration and control" of water and gas lines there are
the following guide; this page shows monetary conversion values
only the functions related to the without time bands. Thanks to
possibility to monitor the controlled the calculation capabilities of the
loads (load management) and to portal it is possible to save and
display energy consumption. Using display the consumption data
the web pages of the portal, it is in without any limitations in terms
fact possible to: of time and maximum number of
Force a load disabled by the central
lines. The data saved are available
unit for load management, or for consultation as charts on
preventive forcing, as well as to web interface, inside the Energy
display the consumptions of the Management section of the Portal.
controlled load (using item F522).

CONTENTS
MyHOME – Load control management
Main features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
General installation rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

WWW.PROFESSIONISTI.BTICINO.IT
MAIN FEATURES
No more outages
The MyHOME load control and The priorities configured according
of one DIN module. This allows
management system manages the to the customer's various needs optimization of spaces inside the
maximum power used, automatically can be disabled or re-enabled via electric panels.
disconnecting the least important the display interfaces. By configuring the load control

appliances in case of overload. It allows the correct functioning
system actuators in automation
The system: of the loads to be checked on mode, via the display interfaces
Manages up to 63 loads.
the display interfaces via the it is possible to set times for
Shows on the display interfaces
measurement of the differential activating the loads.
(e.g. Local Display, Basic energy current absorbed by them.
display, Touch Screen, Webserver) It has devices (central control unit

the instantaneous and cumulative and actuators) with reduced space
consumption of the controlled
phase on an hourly, daily and
monthly basis. Also, consumption
of the controlled load can be
measured thanks to the actuator
with sensor.
Dedicated icon on the

touch screen

Electricity consumption screen (instanta- Graph of electricity consumption in one
neous / cumulative) month
Controlled loads screen Controlled load consumption display

screen (with F522)
Diagnostics
icon
Consumption display Load control management

icon icon

MAIN FEATURES
Operation of the load control and management system
Using the external toroid, the central levels, and a number of devices configurator no. 3; the load
control unit measures the power depending on the available supply is therefore disconnected after the
absorbed by the connected loads current. oven and the washing machine.
and compares it with the value Example: in the example shown, the The user can reactivate the
preselected during installation (via oven, the microwave oven and the disconnected device at any time,
the configurators it is possible to washing machine represent the loads using the actuator pushbutton or
select powers between 1.5 and 18 controlled via actuators, whereas the the touch screen. In this case, if
kW, with a tolerance of +/- 20%). refrigerator, whose operation must the overload condition still exists,
Associated with each device to be not be interrupted, is connected to its the central control unit enables
controlled is an actuator that receives socket without actuator. operation of the selected load, but
the information from the central In case of overload, the first device disconnects the subsequent loads
control unit and disconnects the load disconnected is that deemed the less starting from the least important,
from the grid in case of overload. important by the user (in the example until the overload situation is
The actuator disconnection sequence it is the oven), whose actuator has resolved.
is defined during installation by configurator no. 1. The operating status of the loads
means of a simple configuration The microwave, on the other hand, is indicated by the actuators and
operation to be carried out on the is the most important device, and the touch screens. By configuring
devices. the corresponding actuator has the load control and management
The central control unit enables the system actuators also in automation
management of up to 63 priority Load mode, the touch screen can be used
central control unit
to set the times for the activating the
Electric loads.
meter Electric
switchboard
BUS SCS
230 Vac
Non-controlled Recessed Recessed Recessed

socket actuator actuator actuator
230 Vac
Non-controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled

NOTE: The load control and management unit is inside the load load load load
electric switchboard. priority 1 priority 2 priority 3

DISPLAY FUNCTION The processing and
The load central control unit can metering functions regard:
measure the consumption of Instantaneous consumption of the

the controlled line via the toroid controlled line;
supplied; the data is displayed on Cumulative consumption on an

the touch screens MyHOME_Screen hourly, daily and monthly basis, for
3.5 and MyHOME_Screen10, local the last 12 months.
display, Basic energy display, and on
the web pages of the web server and DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
in the energy data logger. Thanks to the actuator with sensor
(F522) it is possible to display
the consumption, and carry out
diagnostics using the additional
toroid (3523), of the controlled load.

Controlled load diagnostic
display screen
Diagnostics
icon
Load OK
Load close to the differential gap
Load problems (e.g. device grounding

problems)
MyHOME_Screen 3.5

MAIN FEATURES
Device selection criteria
LOAD CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT 16A ACTUATOR WITH CURRENT

F521 SENSOR F522
The device can measure the power The processing and metering The device is an actuator with
absorbed by the electrical system functions are: an integrated current sensor
and control the status of the Load Instantaneous consumption of the
for measuring controlled load
Management system actuators to controlled line; consumptions (instantaneous
prevent the risk of the electricity Cumulative hourly consumptions
consumption and 2 independently
meter tripping. for the last 12 months, daily resettable energy totalizers), and can
The central control unit manages consumptions for the last 2 years, perform energy management and
up to 63 appliances or electric monthly consumptions for the last automation functions.
loads per phase, measures currents 12 years. When configured in energy
and voltages, and processes the The central control unit is suitable management mode, the power
data to provide energy and power for installation in electric panels and absorbed by the load, the power and
information. switchboards and requires the space differential current can be measured
of 1 DIN module. (via the connection of an external
toroid 3523).
16A actuator
with current sensor The actuator is suitable for
installation in electric panels and
230 Vac switchboards and requires the space
connection of 1 DIN module.
Load Device status

central control unit LED 16A actuator
Load forcing
pushbutton
230 Vac 230 Vac

connection connection
Configurator door
Device status Load forcing Device status

LED pushbutton LED
Load forcing
pushbutton
SCS/BUS connection
Configurator door Configurator door
SCS/BUS connection SCS/BUS connection

16A ACTUATOR F523 LOAD COMMAND AND CONTROL RECESSED 16A ACTUATOR
The device is an actuator able to DEVICES HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N
carry out energy management and MyHOME offers a series of devices Actuator designed to be installed in
automation functions. that can display the status of the recessed supports of the Living, Light,
The actuator is suitable for loads controlled by the load central Light Tech and Axolute series
installation in electric panels and control unit F521 and force their intended for automation and/or
switchboards and requires the space operation independently from the energy management functions.
of 1 DIN module. central control unit itself; it is possible The device has:
to: local load forcing pushbutton;
A

Force the priority of the load two-color red/green LED for
A
during normal operation; in this signaling the actuator status;
case the central control unit cannot red LED for signaling relevant
A
deactivate the load for 4 hours. to disabling by the load central

Reactivate a load disabled by the control unit unit.
central control unit, the duration of
forcing is 4 hours unless the key is
pressed. The functions are possible
via the Load control panel (1)
Local Display (2) and Basic energy
display (3).
Local pushbutton for load

Load status red LED forcing/local control
Device status two-color LED
Recessed 16A actuator
Forced load key
Load/programming status Local Display

NOTE 1: art. HD /HC /HS /L/N/NT 4673,
LED
NOTE 2: art. HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4685.

Load control panel
NOTE 3: art. H/LN4710

GENERAL FEATURES
Device selection criteria
DEVICE SELECTION TABLE
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS DEVICES

Electricity Load 16A actuator with 16A actuator Recessed Pulse counter Load control panel
meter central control current sensor 16A actuator interface
unit
Display
Load control
Diagnostics 1)
NOTE 1): In combination with optional toroid 3523
AVAILABLE FUNC- DEVICES

TIONS
Local display MyHOME_Screen 3.5 MyHOME_Screen 10 Energy data Webserver
and Basic energy logger
display
TIME
Basic energy
display
TIME
Local display
Display
Load control
Diagnostics 1)

Maximum number of devices
PHYSICAL LIMIT MAXIMUM NUMBER

The maximum number of devices OF ACTUATORS
that can be connected to the BUS The Load Management central
(load central control unit, actuators, control unit can control up to 63
electricity meter and pulse counter actuators (appliances or electric
interface) depends on their total loads). If the system is only dedicated
absorption and on the distance to Load Management or shares the
between the connection point and same BUS line of the Automation/
the power supply. Temperature control system, the
number of actuators depends on the
If the system uses the same cable limit of the available current.
as the Automation/Temperature
control system, the calculation of
the maximum number of devices
must be done taking into account
their general absorption. For the
purpose of the above calculations,
the following table gives the current
absorbed by each device.
ARTICLE DEVICE ABSORPTION BY BUS

F521 Load central control unit 28 mA
F522 Actuator with sensor 30 mA
F523 Basic actuator 10 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/ Recessed actuator 10 mA
NT4672N
H/HW4890 - LN4890/A MyHOME_Screen 3.5 80 mA
AM4890
H/HW4890 - LN4890/A MyHOME_Screen 10 50 mA
AM4890
MH4892C - MH4893C
F520 Electricity meter 35 mA
3522N Pulse counter interface 7.5 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4673 Load control panel 7 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4891 Local Display 60 mA
F524 Energy data logger 30 mA
H/LN4710 Basic energy display 19÷35 mA (1)
NOTE 1: depending on the backlight set in the device

System sizing
BEAR IN MIND THE FOLLOWING RECOMMENDATIONS:
1. The length of the connection 2. The total length of the BUS must 3. For optimum distribution of
between the power supply and the not exceed 500 m (extended cable). the currents on the BUS line, it is
furthest device must not exceed 250 m. advisable to locate the power supply
in an intermediate position.
B
Power supply
A = 250 m max
B = 250 m max
A+B= 500 m
Maximum current delivered
by the power supply:
1200 mA for art. E46ADCN and
600mA for art. E49.
NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, the

distances indicated must be halved.

CONFIGURATION
General information
The addresses and device 1. Pulse counter interface (3522N),

operation modes are assigned with electricity meter with three inputs
configuration. These can be divided for toroids (F520), Load central
into two categories: control unit (F521) and virtual lines
configurable in the Energy data
logger (F524). All these devices have
an address from 1 to 127.
CONFIGURATOR SEAT CONFIGURATORS USED

A1 is the configurator indicating the 0, 1
hundreds
A2 is the configurator indicating the tens From 0 to 9
A3 is the configurator indicating the From 1 to 9
units
A3-Ta From 1 to 9 (a configurator must be in this seat)
A3-Tb From 1 to 9
A3-Tc From 1 to 9
ATTENTION The 0 configurator in A3-Tb, A3-Tc indicates that the toroid input is not used. A3 or A3Ta cannot be
equal to 0. In case of the meter with several inputs F520, if only one toroid is used, that toroid must be connected
to A3Ta.
Configuration examples:
For electricity meter with three inputs F520 and pulse counter interface 3522N: ATTENTION The devices of this class must have
different addresses: for example, there cannot be
VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS ADDRESSES
a pulse counter interface and a bus meter with 3
A1 0 inputs having the same address. Also, two toroids
A2 0 Toroid connected to Ta with address 001 cannot have the same address. If two consumption/
A3-Ta 1 Toroid connected to Tb with address 002
A3-Tb 2 Toroid connected to Tc with address 003 load control devices are installed on an automation
A3-Tc 3
Electricity meter
or temperature control bus, the configured addresses

do not conflict with the other devices on the system:
A1 1 a temperature control probe configured with address
A2 2 Toroid connected to Ta with address 126
6
11 is not in conflict with a bus meter with 3 inputs
A3-Ta Toroid connected to Tb with address 127
A3-Tb 7 No toroid connected to Tc for toroids with address 11.
A3-Tc 0
UP to 20 lines (toroids) per power supply can be
manged. Example: 6 meters for 3 lines plus 1 meter
Pulse counter interface
A1 0
for 2 lines (total 20).
A2 0
A3 4
G
Pulse counter interface address 004
M
SM

CONFIGURATION
General information
1.
2. Actuators for load control:
art. F522, F523, L/N/NT/HC/HS/HD4672N
The actuators can be used as configuration in energy management configuration software, and define
automation actuators and as mode requires a progressive address the disconnection priorities for the
energy management actuators. from 1 to 63. These addresses are controlled load.
The configuration in automation used in the appropriate touch screen
mode follows the rules outlined
in the automation guide (see the
device technical data sheets); the CONFIGURATOR SEAT CONFIGURATORS USED
P1 is the configurator indicating the tens From 0 to 6
P2 is the configurator indicating the From 0 to 9
Configuration examples: units
For 16A actuator with sensor F522 and actuator 16A F523:
VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS ADDRESSES ATTENTION In case of consumption display/load

control actuators installed on an automation or
16A actuator with sensor
A
temperature control bus, and configured also in
PL
M automation mode (A, PL...), the load control actuator
P1 0
Address priority 01
P2 1 must not have the same address as another actuator
PF
on the automation bus. Example: if actuator
F411/1N A = 1 PL = 1, actuator F522 cannot be
A
PL
configured with PL=1.
M
Address priority 10
16A actuator
G
P1 1
P2 0
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY LOAD CONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEM EXPANSIONS

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION The “Energy Management” system
After installing the devices (Pulse After installing the devices and is a very flexible system allowing
counter interface 3522N, electricity configuring the actuators, the load installation of the devices on the
meter with three inputs for toroids central control unit must acquire automation/temperature control
F520, Load central control unit F521), the actuators on the bus, and the bus, or for creating a system only for
an address must be assigned via corresponding priorities configured. energy management, with dedicated
physical configurators (A1, A2, A3). For more information, see the power supply. In general, all energy
This address will then be used in the technical data sheet of the load management devices can be installed
software for the configuration of central control unit F521 and the on each bus branch and on each
the user interfaces. (e.g. software to technical data sheets of the actuators. expansion, provided this is allowed by
configure MyHOME_Screen 3.5). the absorption calculation. The only
For more information, see the exception is for the actuators which, if
product technical data sheets. also configured in automation mode,
for system expansions follow the
same rules of the automation bus (see
the section on automation).

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 1 DISPLAY OF ELECTRICITY, WATER

AND GAS CONSUMPTIONS
ARTICLE DESCRIPTION ATTENTION
IG Main switch MGT + DIFF The following Touch Screens can be installed:
MGT1 4A MGT switch
E49 Compact power supply - H4684 AXOLUTE
F520 Electricity meter with three inputs - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
3523 Toroid for reading - AM5864 MÀTIX
Touch Screen MyHOME_Screen 3.5/ MyHOME_Screen 10 - MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893
3522N Pulse counter interface
F524 Energy data logger Each F520 is supplied with one toroid 3523
The main switch IG (MGT + DIFF) must be chosen

according to general absorption. For better safety and
comfort, installation of the additional STOP&GO device is
advisable
N To the other
users
L N
230 Vac
L
IG MGT1
4A
3523 Modem Router/

Switch
Touch Screen
E49 F520 F524
PRI
E49
A1 =0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
A2 =0
A3TA =1
600 mA
SCS A3TB =0
A3TC =0
BUS/SCS
Switchboard or electric panel
A1 = 0 A1 = 0
A2 = 0 A2 = 0
3522N A3 = 2 3522N A3 = 3
MUL = - MUL = -
DIV = - DIV = -
Zener Barrier/Galvanic
insulation Barrier 1)
NOTES: 1) The barrier must meet Atex requirements and Gas meter with Water meter
be installed outside the Atex area. pulse output with pulse output

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 2 DISPLAY OF THREE-PHASE AND THREE-PHASE LOAD TOTAL CONSUMPTION
R 3523
S 3523
T 3523
N
MGT6 E49 F520 F520 F520

F881NA/4 PRI
A1 =0 A1 =0 A1 =0
A2 =0 A2 =0 A2 =0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
A3TA =1 A3TA =3 A3 =5
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS A3TB =2 A3TB =4 A3TB =6

A3TC = A3TC = A3TC =
BUS/SCS
Switchboard or
electric panel
ATTENTION
The meter must be chosen according to the load.
Configure the device to add together the active powers

ARTICLE DESCRIPTION of the loads and total consumption (physical and virtual
lines of the energy data logger).
E49 Compact power supply
F520 Electricity meter with three inputs
3523 Toroid for reading Each F520 is supplied with one toroid 3523 for current
Touch Screen MyHOME_Screen 3.5/ MyHOME_Screen 10 reading.
H/LN4710 Basic energy display
F524 Energy data Logger The following Touch Screens can be installed:
FC4A... AC contactor - H4684 Axolute
- L4684 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MATIX
- MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893

R
S
T
N
3523
3523
3523
Touch Screen
TIME
To other devices if present
F524 FC4A...
Modem Router/
Switch
Three-phase load

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 3 DISPLAY OF BALANCE OF PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY PRODUCED AND ELECTRICITY CONSUMED -

THREE-PHASE SYSTEM
Photovoltaic generator string
– + – + – +
String String String
switchboard 1 switchboard 2 switchboard 3
–+ – + – +
Configure the device to perform the operations of the
energy data logger physical and virtual lines.
N
T Wh
S
Each F520 is supplied with one toroid 3523 for current
Inverter R
reading.
Production
meter MGT1
The following Touch Screens can be installed:
- H4684 Axolute
- L4684 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MATIX 004
- MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893 3523
005
006
R
Wh S
T
N
Feed-in/draw
meter
003
002
001
MGT6 E49 F520 F520 F520 F524

F881NA/4 PRI
A1 =0 A1 =0 A1 =0
A2 =0 A2 =0 A2 =0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
A3TA =1 A3TA =3 A3 =5
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS A3TB =2 A3TB =4 A3TB =6

A3TC = A3TC = A3TC =
BUS/SCS

Quantity to display Address of measurement line (physical or virtual) Notes
Consumption Phase 1 001
Production Phase 1 004

Virtual address of Data Logger obtained from the sum
Photovoltaic panel 007
of lines 004+005+006.
Virtual address of Data Logger obtained from the sum
Total electricity consumption 008
of lines 001+002+003.
Virtual address of Data Logger obtained from the difference
Draw from grid 009
of lines 008-007.
Grid feed-in 010
of lines 007-008.
Self-consumption 011
of lines 008-009.
R
S
T
N
003 3523
002 3523
001 3523
Touch Screen
TIME
To other devices if present N R S T
To loads

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 4 DISPLAY OF ELECTRICITY CONSUMPTION OF SEVERAL LINES VIA ENERGY DATA LOGGER
Electricity consumption Other electricity consumption
N N
L L
230 Vac
IG
MGT1 MGT2 MGT3 MGT4 MGT5
001 013
3523 3523
005
3523 012
Outlets 1
3523
011
3523
Outlets 2
Outlets 3
Cooling
MGT6 E49 F520 F520
F881NA/4 PRI
E49
A1 =0 A1 =0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
A2 =0 A2 =1
A3TA =1 A3TA =1
600 mA
SCS A3TB =5 A3TB =2

A3TC =0 A3TC =3
ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
3523 Toroid
IG Main switch MGT + DIFF
MGT1-5 Line protection switch
H/LN4710 Energy display
F524 Energy data logger

Lighting
Non-electric consumption
Heating
A1 = 0 Heat meter pulse
A2 = 0
3522N 003 A3 = 3
MUL = -
DIV = -
DHW
A1 = 0 Volume meter pulse
A2 = 0
3522N 007 A3 = 7
MUL = -
DIV = -
Total water
A1 = 0 Volume meter pulse
A2 = 0
3522N 008 A3 = 8
Energy display MUL = -
H/LN4710 (*) DIV = -
F524
A The main switch IG (MGT + DIFF) must be chosen according to general absorption. For
TIME
better safety and comfort, installation of the additional STOP&GO device is advisable
B Main MGT switches must be chosen according to load absorption
Note (*): Alternatively or in addition to the Basic energy display device it is possible to use the external station Class 100 art. 344602 configured as shown below.
JMP
= -
N
F524 = -
= -
P
= -
= 8
M
= -
344602
BUS

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 5 DISPLAY OF SEVEN GENERIC ELECTRIC CONSUMPTIONS, ENERGY CONSUMPTION FOR WATER
(FROM VOLUME COUNTER) AND HEATING (FROM HEAT METER)
N N
L L
230 Vac
IG
MGT1 MGT2 MGT3 MGT4 MGT5 MGT6 3523 007
001
3523
006
3523
005
3523
Cooling
004
3523
DHW
003
3523
002
3523 Outlets 1
MGT6 E49 F520 (*) F520 F520 Outlets 2

F881NA/4 PRI
A1 =0 A1 =0 A1 =0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz A2 =0 A2 =0 A2 =0 NOTE (*): Alternatively it is
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3TA =1 A3TA =2 A3TA =5 possible to use the load control

SCS A3TB =0 A3TB =3 A3TB =6 unit art. F521 configured A1 = 0,
A3TC =0 A3TC =4 A3TC =7 A2 = 0, A3 = 1, P = 0 and TOL = 5.
ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
3523 Toroid
MGT1-6 Line protection switch

Energy display
Lighting H/LN4710 (*)
TIME
Various services
(gate, swimming pool pump)
A1 = 0 DHW A1 = 0 Heating
A2 = 0 Volume meter pulse A2 = 0 Heat meter pulse
A3 = 8 A3 = 9
MUL = - MUL = -
DIV = - DIV = -
008 009
3522N 3522N
A The main switch IG (MGT + DIFF) must be chosen according to general absorption.
For better safety and comfort, installation of the additional STOP&GO device is advisable
B Main MGT switches must be chosen according to load absorption
Note (*): Alternatively or in addition to the Basic energy display device it is possible to use the external station Class 100 art. 344602 configured as shown below.
JMP
= -
N
= -
= -
P
= -
= GEN
M
= -
344602
BUS

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 6 DISPLAY OF ENERGY PRODUCED AND CONSUMED
ATTENTION
If a photovoltaic system and a thermal solar system for
ARTICLE DESCRIPTION The following Touch Screens may be installed:
the production of electricity and hot water are installed,
E49 Compact power supply by using energy measurement devices and pulse - H4684 AXOLUTE
F520 Electricity meter with three inputs counter interface the energy produced or the amount of - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
3523 Toroid for reading heated water can be displayed on the touch screen. - AM5864 MÀTIX
3522N Pulse counter interface - MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893
Touch Screen MyHOME_Screen 3.5/
MyHOME_Screen 10 General MGT switches must be chosen according to load
IG Main switch MGT + DIFF absorption
MGT1-2 MGT protection switch
reading

advisable
230 Vac
L N Photovoltaic generator string L N 230 Vac
Feed-in/
Wh draw meter
Wh
MGT1
IG
Inverter String switchboard

3523
– –
+ + 3523
L
MGT2
Touch Screen
E49 F520 F520
PRI
A1 =0 A1 =0
A2 =0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
A2 =0
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3TA =1 A3TA =2
SCS
A3TB =0 A3TB =0
A3TC =0 A3TC =0
BUS/SCS To other devices if present
A1 = 0
A2 = 0 Water meter
A3 = 3
with pulse output
MUL = - Storage
DIV = - battery
3522N

DIAGRAM 7 DISPLAY OF ENERGY PRODUCED AND CONSUMED
IN EXCHANGE MODE ON THE SPOT
ATTENTION
ARTICLE DESCRIPTION In a system with photovoltaic panels configured for

The following Touch Screens can be installed:
a delivery of energy in “local exchange” mode, the
E49 Compact power supply bus meter with 3 toroids can be installed as shown in - H4684 AXOLUTE
F520 Electricity meter with three inputs the figure: one toroid measures the current produced - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
3523 Toroid for reading by the photovoltaic panels, and the other the home - AM5864 MÀTIX
Touch Screen MyHOME_Screen 3.5/ - MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893
consumption. Attention: Avoid fitting the measuring
MyHOME_Screen 10
IG Main switch MGT + DIFF toroid directly on the main bidirectional meter.
MGT switches must be chosen according to load
MGT1-3 MGT protection switch absorption
reading
advisable
Photovoltaic generator string 230 Vac

L N
Production Feed-in/
meter draw meter
Wh
Wh
MGT1 Inverter String switchboard MGT2
– –
+ +
3523
IG
3523
L
N
MGT3
Touch Screen
E49 F520
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
A1 = 0
A2 = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A3TA = 1
A3TB = 2
A3TC = 0
BUS SCS To other devices if present

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 8 DISPLAY OF BALANCE OF PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY PRODUCED AND ELECTRICITY CONSUMED

VIA ENERGY DATA LOGGER
L N 230 Vac
Photovoltaic generator string Feed-in/
Production meter draw meter
Wh
Wh
MGT1 MGT2
Inverter String switchboard
- -
+ +
002 N N
L L
230 Vac
MGT3 MGT4
IG
To the electric
001 loads
3523
Energy display
F520 E49 H/LN4710
PRI
F524
A1 =0 E49
A2 =0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc TIME
A3TA =1
600 mA
A3TB =2 SCS
A3TC =0

Quantity to display Address of measurement line (physical or virtual) Notes
Total electricity consumption 001 It can be the physical address 001 of a toroid
Photovoltaic panel 002 It can be the physical address 002 of a toroid

Draw from grid 003
of lines 001-002.
Grid feed-in 004
of lines 002-001.
Self-consumption 005
of lines 001-003.
ARTICLE DESCRIPTION The main switch IG (MGT + DIFF) must be chosen according to
general absorption. For better safety and comfort, installation
E49 Compact power supply of the additional STOP&GO device is advisable
3523 Toroid
IG Main switch MGT + DIFF Main MGT switches must be selected according to load
MGT1-4 Line protection switch MGT + DIFF absorption
Each F520 is supplied with one toroid 3523 for current reading
F524 Energy data logger
Configure the device to perform the operations of the energy
data logger physical and virtual lines.

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 9 DISPLAY OF THERMAL

POWER/HOT WATER CONSUMPTION BY INDIVIDUAL HOME
In a complex with central heating, by connecting a ATTENTION

ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
pulse counter interface to the pulse output of the meter
E46ADCN Power supply of a MyHOME system, it is possible to display on the The following Touch Screens can be installed:
...4695 4 zone central control unit touch screens the data made available by the meter
...4692 probe with adjustment - H4684 AXOLUTE
(hot water consumption, thermal power). The meter - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
F430/2 2 relay DIN actuator must have pulse outputs and is installed at the inlet of
F430/4 4 relay DIN actuator - AM5864 MÀTIX
the distribution manifold. - MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893
Touch Screen MyHOME_Screen 3.5 /
MyHOME_Screen 10 The following 4 zone central control units can be
installed:
- HC/HS4695 AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4695 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
- AM5875 MATIX
Home n
The following probes with knob can be installed:
ZONE 3 -2 -1 -2 -1
ZONE 2
-3
-3
- HC/HS4692 AXOLUTE
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
4692 4692
- L/N/NT4692 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
- AM5872 MATIX
ZONE 4 ZONE 1
18.0°C
-2 -1 23.7°C
-3
+1 OFF
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
C OK
4692 4695
Home 2
ZONE 3 ZONE 2
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
4692 4692
ZONE 4 -2 -1 23.7°C
18.0°C
ZONE 1 Meter
-3
+1 OFF
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
Mixing valve
C OK
4692 4695
M management
central control
Home 1 Mixing valve unit
Central boiler
Main
solenoid valve
F430/2 F430/4 Touch Screen
E46ADCN ...4695
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C1 C2 C3 C4
C OK
230 Vac BUS/SCS
A1 = 0
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
A2 = 0
A3 = 1
-3
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF +1 OF
F F F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
MUL = -
DIV = -
...4692 ...4692 ...4692
3522N
NOTE: The pulse counter interface is recommended (M=2) for measuring the thermal power.

DIAGRAM 10 LOAD CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT
WITH DISPLAY OF TOTAL CONSUMPTION
E49 Compact power supply The following Touch Screens can be installed:
F521 Load central control unit
F523 1 M DIN 6A basic actuator - H4684 AXOLUTE
3523 Toroid for reading - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
Touch Screen MyHOME_Screen 3.5 / - AM5864 MÀTIX
MyHOME_Screen 10 - MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893
The following 2 module recessed 16A actuators can be
MGT1 4A MGT switch
installed:
...4672N Recessed actuator
- HC/HS/HD4672N AXOLUTE
H/LN4710 Basic energy display
- L/N/NT4672N LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
Main MGT switches must be chosen according to load

absorption
N
L N The main switch IG (MGT + DIFF) must be chosen
230 Vac according to general absorption. For better safety and
L comfort, installation of the additional STOP&GO device is
advisable
MGT1 MGT2 Each F521 is supplied with one toroid 3523 for current
reading
IG
N
L
3523
Load Load Load
L N ...4672N
E49 F521 F523 F523

PRI
A = 0 A = 0 A = 0 Basic energy display
A1 = 0
E49
PL = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
A2 = 0
G = 0 G = 0 G = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
A3 = 1
600 mA
M = 0 M = 0 M = 0
SCS P = 0
P1 = 0 P1 = 0 P1 = 0
TOL = 5
P2 = 2 P2 = 1 P2 = 3
TIME
BUS/SCS

WIRING DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM 11 LOAD CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT WITH

DISPLAY OF TOTAL LOADS AND DIAGNOSTICS
E49 Compact power supply The following Touch Screens can be installed:
F521 Load central control unit
F523 1 M DIN 16A basic actuator - H4684 AXOLUTE
F522 16A actuator with sensor - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
3523 Toroid for reading - AM5864 MÀTIX
Touch Screen MyHOME_Screen 3.5 / MyHOME_Screen 10 - MyHOME_Screen 10 MH4892 - MH4893
Main MGT switches must be chosen according to load
MGT1 4A MGT switch
absorption

reading

N comfort, installation of the additional STOP&GO device is
advisable
L N
230 Vac
L the actuator F522 with integrated current sensor can
measure the consumptions of the controlled load. By
connecting a toroid 3523 to the device, it is possible to
MGT1 MGT2 measure the differential current and display the load
status on the Touch screen
IG
N
L
3523
Load Load Load Load
L N
Touch Screen
E49 F521 F522 F523 F522 F522
PRI
A1 = 0 A = 0 A = 0 A = 0 A = 0
A2 = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
M = 0 G = 0 M = 0 M = 0
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3 = 1
SCS P = 0 P1 = 0 M = 0 P1 = 0 P1 = 0
TOL = 5 P2 = 2 P1 = 0 P2 = 3 P2 = 4
PF = 5 P2 = 1 PF = 0 PF = 0
BUS/SCS

DIAGRAM 12 THREE-PHASE AND SINGLE-PHASE
E49 Compact power supply Main MGT switches must be selected according to load
F521 Load central control unit absorption
F523 1 M DIN 16A basic actuator
3523 Toroid for reading The contactor must be selected according to load
MCB MGT switch absorption
FC4A... AC contactor The three-phase line must be balanced
380 Vac
R R
S S
T T
N N
MGT1 MGT2
Single-phase
R N
load
E49 F521 F523 F523

PRI
A = 0 A = 0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
A1 = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0
A2 = 0 G = 0 G = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A3 = 1 M = 0 M = 0
P = 1) P1 = 0 P1 = 0
TOL = 1) P2 = 1 P2 = 2
BUS/SCS 1
E49 F521 F523

PRI
A = 0
A1 = 0
PL = 0 R N
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
A2 = 0
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
G = 0
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3 = 1
M = 0
SCS
P = 1) FC4A...
P1 = 0
TOL = 1)
P2 = 1
BUS/SCS 2
E49 F521 F523

PRI
A = 0 Three-phase load
E49
A1 = 0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
PL = 0
A2 = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
G = 0
600 mA
A3 = 1
SCS M = 0
P = 1)
TOL = 1)
P1 = 0 NOTE: 1) the configurators must be chosen according to the rated power.
P2 = 1
BUS/SCS 3

204 MyHOME Functions integration and control
CONTENTS
MyHOME – Functions integration and control
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Functions integration and control MyHOME 205

GENERAL FEATURES
Functions integration:
Before describing the various ways of Integration between different
Integration between one or more

integrating MyHOME it is necessary MyHOME systems, for example the MyHOME systems with BTicino
to define the two possible types: lights Automation system with the and/or other manufacturers
Burglar alarm system or the Video systems based on different
door entry system with the sound communication protocols; this
system. allows for example to manage
the BTicino NUVO digital audio
system or HITACHI, SAMSUNG, or
other conditioning systems with
MyHOME.
Video Display
MyHOME_Screen 10
Local Display
Nighter control
MyHOME_Screen 3.5 Integrated MyHOME
functions
PC with MHVISUAL software

Special
control

Both solutions are implemented, volume of the background music corridor or in the living room. Also,
depending on the systems, with or at the arrival of a door entry call. when away from home, it will be
without specific interfaces and have It makes it possible to centrally
possible to check and manage the
the following advantages: control all the functions using MyHOME functions using a PC or
centralized management devices. a mobile device connected to the
Creation of advanced functions
In this way, it will be possible Internet.
such as switching on of all the to check locally all the systems
lights following an intrusion alarm, installed using only one device
or automatically decrease the positioned, for example, in the
Interfaces
NUVO audio system
SYSTEMS OF OTHER MANUFACTURERS
SCS/DALI interface Air conditioning

systems
Web server F454 Lighting

with RGB lamps
Driver manager F459
Weather stations and

sensors management
Interface for
Splitter management

GENERAL FEATURES
Integration between different MyHOME systems

Depending on the systems installed, burglar-alarm system and the Interface F422
the integration is automatically automation system, which are

ensured by the use of the same BUS provided with specific cables that
wiring or, if this is not possible, using can connected to each other using a
integration interfaces. specific SCS/SCS interface item F422.
This is for example the case of the
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT TV/SAT

Video door entry and home video
surveillance system SCS/SCS Automation SCS/SCS Burglar alarm
interface interface
o termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi

automazione automazione
energia
diffusione sonora diffusione
luci sonora
antifurto tvcc antifurto
termoregolazione termoregolazione
www
videocitofonia videocitofonia
irrigazione controllo controllo
lan
Audio/video node
(or Multichannel matrix)
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV
automazione
moregolazione diffusione sonora
videocitofonia antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan tvcc controllo carichi www energiairrigazione luci tvcc
Sound systemcontrollo lan controllo carichi Energyenergia
management luci

AUTOMATION AND LOADS
MANAGEMENT, ENERGY
CONSUMPTION, TEMPERTURE
CONTROL the devices share the same BUS cable electric power supplies), these can be
The integration between these and power supply. connected to each other using the
functions is achieved without the To keep the two systems separate F422 interface in “physical separation”
need for an interface. This is because (for example to use independent mode: MOD = 6”.
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IP
AUTOMATION ENERGY MANAGEMENT
utomazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia

automazione controllo
diffusione sonora lanantifurto controllo carichi
termoregolazione energia
videocitofonia luci
controllo tvcc lan ww
contro
Light Shutter control Temperature Temperature

switch probe probe
230 Vac BUS SCS
TV/SAT IPTV
Dimmer 2 relay Temperature control Temperature control

actuator TV/SAT actuator TV/SAT actuator actuator
IPTV IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrig
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione

automazione videocitofonia
diffusione sonora controlloantifurto lan
termoregolazione
controllovideocitofonia
carichi energiacontrollo luci lan tvcc
controllo carichi wwwenergia irrigazione luci tvcc www irrigazione
ora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Lights Shutters Radiator Radiator

GENERAL FEATURES
Integration between different MyHOME systems

MOD=6 PHYSICAL SEPARATION
This mode brings together configuration. management system if it is required
the features of the “physical Each system can be connected both to keep the respective BUSes
expansion” mode, described in the to the OUT and the IN clamp of the separate and the power supplies
“AUTOMATION” section, and the interface. independent for each system.
features of the “galvanic separation” The F422 interface in this mode
mode, and can be used for systems can also be used to integrate the
with devices preset for virtual Automation system with the energy
TV/SAT IPTV
AUTOMATION
Power supply
SYSTEM
TV/SAT ENERGY
IPTV
MANAGEMENT
Power supply
SYSTEM
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo ca
230 Vac
OUT
SCS interface
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo MOD=6
lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
230 Vac
IN

Integration between MyHOME and systems of other
manufacturers
My Home is an open system a. by means of the MyHOME_Link c. using the OpenWebNet
that easily integrates, without integration platform which involves communication protocol made
modification, with the best the use of the Driver Manager available by BTicino.
technologies and with systems and F459 device and the TCP / IP
devices from other manufacturers. communication protocol;
The integration is carried out with the
following modalities: b. by devices for integration with
different communication protocols
such as EIB, DALI, etc.;
A. INTEGRATION BY MYHOME_LINK PLATFORM
MyHOME_Link is the new integration temperature control system, VRV, VRF programmed with multiple drivers to
platform that uses the driver systems and air conditioning systems manage multiple different systems
manager device item F459 properly of the main manufacturers on the integrated with MyHOME.
configured with the specific market or to use the light automation To know about the different
driver to manage the functions/ devices to control the LED lamps integration solutions visit www.
systems of other manufacturers. (type HUE and similar) or to control professionisti.bticino.it/integrazione_
This solution allows, for example, to the BTicino NUVO digital audio myhome/.
manage through the MyHome zone system. The device item F459 can be
SPECIFIC DRIVER
FOR THE APPLICATION
NUVO audio system

Driver manager F459
SYSTEMS OF OTHER
MANUFACTURERS
BUS SCS LAN network
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

DAIKIN

HITACHI

PHILIPS HUE

DMX

NETATMO

SAMSUNG

For technical information, insights and be informed about all available drivers OREGON SCIENTIFIC

contact BTicino. ...........


GENERAL FEATURES

manufacturers
EXAMPLE OF MYHOME INTEGRATION WITH THE NUVO DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM
8" drywall speakers 6.5" ceiling speakers
MyHOME_Screen 10
Multizone player
LAN
Driver manager
F459
Basic 8-key
ADSL control control
Internet Modem/Router
Wi-Fi
MyHOME BUS
PC desktop
PC
Network hard disk

EXAMPLE OF MYHOME INTEGRATION WITH 0-10V FAN-COIL SYSTEMS
MyHOME_Screen10
Living room
Internal floor unit

Actuator Actuator
F430V10 F430/2 (*)
Kitchen
Internal floor unit
Actuator Actuator Probe con display
F430V10 F430/2 (*)
Bedroom
Internal floor unit

Actuator Actuator Probe con display
F430V10 F430/2 (*)
Temperature control unit
Driver manager F459

GENERAL FEATURES

manufacturers
EXAMPLE OF MYHOME INTEGRATION WITH MITSUBISHI AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Living room MyHOME_Screen 10
Ceiling indoor unit
Kitchen
Ceiling indoor unit

Probe con display
Bedroom
Probe con display
Ceiling indoor unit
Ethernet Switch
Ethernet Switch Temperature control unit
Gateway GB-50ADA
Driver manager F459

EXAMPLE OF MYHOME INTEGRATION WITH PHILIPS HUE LIGHTING SYSTEM
Philips HUE Lamps and Gateway
Router
MyHOME_Screen 10
Driver manager
F459
8-key
control
ON/OFF and color MyHOME BUS

change controls

GENERAL FEATURES

manufacturers
EXAMPLE OF MYHOME INTEGRATION WITH WEATHER SENSOR, LIGHT SENSOR, ETC.
Light, water, gas, etc., sensors
Weather sensors
Modbus/TCP/IP Meteobridge Gateway

converter
Router
MyHOME_Screen 10
MH202 scenario Driver manager

programmer F459
Data displaying Creation of scenario MyHOME BUS

devices according to the data
measured by the
sensors

B. INTEGRATION THROUGH DEDICATED INTERFACES.
The BTicino range includes devices

for integration with the following
systems and protocols:
- EIB (interface item. F426);
- DALI (interface item F429);
- Splitter control with IR interface
(item 3456);
- BACnet (interface item F450).
SCS/EIB interface Interface for

Splitter management
TV/SAT IPTV
EXAMPLE OF INTEGRATION OF MYHOME WITH DALI DEVICES THROUGH DEDICATED INTERFACE
Power supply Actuator
To DALI devices
230 Vac
SYSTEM
MyHOME

GENERAL FEATURES

manufacturers
C. INTEGRATION BY USE OF THE OPENWEBNET COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
OpenWebNet is the communication communication support: it is

protocol developed by BTicino and possible to control and monitor
made available through the MyOPEN the MyHOME system through the
Community to integrate MyHOME Ethernet network, through an RS232
with standard Konnex, BACNET, DALI serial connection, through a USB
and TCP/IP third party devices. connection, or through a Gateway
The protocol has been designed directly connected to the system.
to be independent from the
Web
Server
Actuator
DALIdimmer
TCP/IP
Lighting management Supervision Communication Lights
in the service sector via the Internet monitoring
Some possible solutions: for the management of lights and

- use of third party software for the shutters by disabled people;
control of the MyHOME functions - customization of the MyHOME_
using devices such as I-PHONE, Screen 3.5
I-PAD and Smartphone; Touch Screen icons for hotel
- integration with MyHOME of applications, or for use in public
devices appropriately configured establishments and showrooms.

MY OPEN COMMUNITY: TOOLS AND DEVELOPMENT
Created in 2006, it is a virtual TOOLS FOR OPEN WEB NET
community, that through the website APPLICATIONS
http://www.myopen-legrandgroup. For the development of applications
com, provides professionals, software using the Open Web Net language,
developers and system integrators BTicino has implemented the
several services: space for uploading interface L4686SDK for the MyHOME
and downloading, development system connection to the RS232 port
tools and applications developed, of a PC through USB connection.
newsletters and event information. Through the Hyper Terminal or
Minicom program it is possible to
It is also a platform capable send and receive commands or
of providing information on status messages with Open Web Net
the MyHOME system and the protocol to and from the MyHome
development products available, system.
including any relevant support
documentation and a forum, always
active and lively, that provides
continuous exchange of knowledge
and experiences in the Open Web Net
language field.
For more information visit

http://www.myopen-legrandgroup.com

GENERAL FEATURES
System control
The BTicino MyHOME system can the house, or remotely, i.e. from a
monitor and control your home or place other than where the MyHome
office in total safety and privacy. equipment is installed.
TV/SAT
Control can be done locally, i.e. inside IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregol
LOCAL CONTROL
The system can command and
control the MyHOME system, using
the basic and advanced controls.
zione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
This is the case for example of the
scenario control that allows, with a
single gesture, to manage multiple
devices inside the house (curtains,
shutters, lights...).
Scenario control
iPad with MyHOME BTicino Application
CONTROL WITH PC AND IPAD

It is also possible to supervise and
control the system using a PC with PC with MHVISUAL software
MHVISUAL software installed, and

an iPad with the BTicino MyHOME The BTicino MyHOME application is
application. only available from the Apple Store in
In the MyOpen community, the following versions:
available at www.myopen- - free DEMO, with limited
legrandgroup.com, functionality;
it is possible to find several - at fee, including all the MyHOME
applications made by third parties functions.
to carry out MyHome control with
various modes.

REMOTE CONTROL
The system allows to control and Internet
monitor the system remotely via the
MyHOME_Web portal or through the
point-to-point Internet connection.
The extremely quick, private and safe
system provides control of your home
from anywhere, also performing the
home video surveillance system and
the burglar-alarm system monitoring
functions (sending SMS messages or
e-mails with attachments).
Remote connection can be achieved Point-point connection:

in two different ways: the ADSL line and Internet give
access to the MyHome system functions control is carried out
MyHOME_Web portal:
establishing a direct connection to through dedicated Web pages.
virtual platform for remote a fixed IP address of the Web server
management services dedicated to in the system. The home automation
users who have a MyHome system
equipped with BTicino devices for
remote connection (web server
or burglar alarm central unit with
communicator).
MyHOME_Wed is intended both for
installers and users; the installers
will be able to offer their customers
a remote assistance and remote Mobile access Internet
system diagnostic service. Using
a mobile phone or a PC with
TV/SAT IPTV
Internet connection, users will be
able to remotely control all the
home automation functions, like
for example the activation of the Internet
cameras for the monitoring of the
home, the reception of video door
o termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Point-point connection
entry system calls when away from
the home, the activation of the
burglar-alarm system and the heating
Web Server
system.

GENERAL FEATURES
Local control devices

The MyHOME system can be Just one command manages simple touch let you switch ON lights, raise
commanded and controlled used functions such as switching on a shutters, switch on the sound system,
various interfaces, from the simplest light and advanced functions such set the temperature etc...)
such as the basic control to the most as scenarios (which with just one
advanced like the TOUCH SCREEN.
CONTROLS WITH CAPACITIVE

SENSORS Nighter 3 module control
Devices with buttons made of
capacitive sensors.
Each zone corresponding to a key
is marked in the center by a lit LED
that increases in brightness when the
user put his/her finger to activate the
control. Whice 4 module control
It is produced in versions with 3 and 4

flush mounted modules,
respectively with 6 and 8 keys.
2 module Soft Touch control

TOUCH CONTROLS WITH 2 OR 3
MODULES
This device is able to send actuation
and adjustment controls for lighting
functions (ON/OFF, Dimmer, timers,
etc.), sound system and video door
entry functions by simply touching the
control surface.

INFRARED CONTROLS
IR receiver and new IR remote control: IR receiver
with the receiver, manual control
can be replaced or integrated with
a remote control, using the infrared
remote control.
IR remote control
It is possible to associate to the double loads (rolling shutter motor

remote control pushbuttons controls etc.), manage scenarios, as well as
intended for 1-relay actuators for sound system and video door entry
single loads and 2-relay actuators for systems.
CODE PROTECTED CONTROL

When used in the Automation
system, the device created for Code protected control
arming/disarming the Burglar-alarm

system can be used to manage basic
and advanced controls, which are
Transponder
protected and can be activated using
a transponder badge.

GENERAL FEATURES

LIGHT AND PRESENCE SENSOR
Using IR sensors of Green Switch user to obtain different levels of
series and sensors also present in energy efficiency.
the Lighting Management range it comfort and wellbeing.

is possible to manage lighting in a The new sensors allow increasing
MyHOME system depending on the the level of comfort of the users,
presence of people and on the with the automatic switching on of
amount of natural light. the light when entering
This provides two advantages: the room, and the preservation
greater energy management
of the desired lighting level based
reducing energy waste through on external conditions.
an intelligent management of
the lights, ensuring the necessary
lighting levels, at the right time
and in the right place. The various
Light and presence
operating modes that can be set sensors
Passive IR movement sensor
with the configuration enable the - AUTO MODE-
LOCAL DISPLAY BASIC ENERGY DISPLAY MyHOME_Screen 3.5

TOUCH SCREEN OLED technology Device for displaying produced This is a room control for all the
control device for the control or consumed energy data and MyHOME functions. It is possible
of the Automation (scenario for controlling and displaying for example to switch the lights on
management), Temperature control, the status of the electrical loads and off, lower or rise the shutters,
Energy consumption display, Loads managed by the loads control control garden watering, adjust the
management and Sound system system. temperature in the various rooms,
functions of the MyHOME system. etc., and to automatically activate
Local display scenarios based on logic or time
MyHOME_Screen 3.5 conditions. The display shows a
“home page”, inside which the
applications that can be managed
are graphically represented. Touch
the icon for the application to be
managed (e.g. Lighting) to display
a page with the included and
customized icons for the light points.
Again, with a simple touch on the
icon chosen, the lamp or lamps
associated with it will switch on or off.
Basic
energy display

MyHOME_Screen 10 CUSTOMIZATION
Thanks to the 10” capacitive Touch Screen, a simple touch of Users can customize their own profiles directly on the
the simple and intuitive icons with your fingers is enough to display, easily navigate through the rooms, manage
manage the electric system, the video door entry system, the and control the home.
multimedia functions (photos, audio, video), and the Internet
connection.
VIDEO DISPLAY AND VIDEO STATION

Thanks to simple and integrated management of all functions:
MyHOME home automation, Nuvo audio system, video door
entry system, video surveillance, at your fingertips.
EASY TO ADAPT DESIGN

A design that fits your taste and your style, and a new
ergonomic design available in two colors, black and white. All
to provide you with a unique experience thanks to the ease of
installation on the wall.
Buttons for
video door entry
functions
SD Card
USB

GENERAL FEATURES

TABLE FOR THE SELECTION OF DEVICES BASED ON CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS
BASIC CONTROL SPECIAL CONTROL GREEN SWITCH GREEN SWITCH REMOTE CONTROL
CONTROL CONTROL
HD4653M2/3 H/LN4652
H4652/2 H4651M2
HC4653/2/3
FUNCTIONS PERFORMED L4652/2 L4651M2
HS4653/2/3
AM5832/2 AM5831M2 3529
H4652/3 HD4654
L4652/3 HC4654
AM5832/3 HS4654
L/N/NT4654N
88232
Cyclical ON/OFF

LIGHTING
controls
Timed controls
Shutter control
AUTOMATION UP/DOWN in safe mode
controls
Recalling of scenarios
saved in the F420 scenario
module
SCENARIO
MANAGEMENT Activation of scenarios
saved in the MH200N
scenario programmer (CEN
configurator)
TEMPERATURE Temperature display and

CONTROL zone management
Consumption control and

ENERGY display
SAVING
Anti black-out load
management
Display of network
MULTIMEDIA
multimedia contents (IP
FUNCTIONS
Radio and Media Server)

LIGHT AND MOVEMENT/ BADGE-HOLDER TRANSPONDER CAPACITIVE NIGHTER SCENARIO CONTROL
PRESENCE SENSOR POCKET READER AND WHICE CONTROL
HC/HD/HS4658 H4648 HD4607 HD4680

HC/HD/HS4659 H4649 HC4607 HC4680
HS4607 HD4657M3/4 HS4680
L/N/NT4658 LN4648
L/N/NT4607 HC4657M3/4 L4680
L/N/NT4659 LN4649 HS4657M3/4 N4680
BMSE3001
BMSE3003 NT4680
048834

GENERAL FEATURES

LOCAL DISPLAY MyHOME_Screen 3.5 MyHOME_Screen 10
HD4891
FUNCTIONS PERFORMED HC4891
HS4891
L4891
N4891
H4890 MH4892
NT4891
LN4890 MH4893
HW4890 MH4892C
LN4890A MH4892C
Cyclical ON/OFF

LIGHTING
General room
and group controls
Timed controls
Shutter control
AUTOMATION
UP/DOWN in safe mode
General room and group controls
Recalling of scenarios saved in

the F420 scenario module
SCENARIO
MANAGEMENT Activation of scenarios saved in
the MH200N scenario program-
mer (CEN configurator)
TEMPERATURE Temperature display and zone

CONTROL management
Consumption control and display

ENERGY
SAVING
Anti black-out load manage-
ment
Display of network multimedia

MULTIMEDIA
contents (IP Radio and Media
FUNCTIONS
Server)

VIDEO HANDSETS
349311/12/13

GENERAL FEATURES

SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS activations which constitute the following:
The control devices described in the environmental situation of comfort Scenario module F420 with two

preceding pages can be configured and/or of energy saving to replicate. DIN modules for saving up to 16
to activate, for example with the A scenario example is switching on scenarios.
push of a button, several users some lights to a certain intensity MH202 scenario programmer for

simultaneously. level, and positioning some shutters the creation and management of
This feature, called “scenario” is for watching the television or reading advanced scenarios, also linked
carried out in conjunction with the a book, following the lifestyle of the to time events, system status, and
use of special devices capable of user. more.
saving or programming all individual The devices mentioned are the
MyHOME_Screen 10
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto
Green Switch control and MH202 scenario programmers

light/movement sensor
Touch Screen
TV/SAT
Nighter & Whice control
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo

In addition to the lights and shutter
features, both devices can manage
sound system, temperature control
and video entry system applications.
The scenario programmer item
MH202 is able to mange even
Burglar-alarm functions.
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc w
Special control
Scenario module F420
Soft Touch control
Local display
IPTV 8-key control
Protected scenario control with transponder (*)
controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione Scenario control

GENERAL FEATURES

MH202 SCENARIO
PROGRAMMER
The device performs the scenarios An event of the burglar-alarm
and date enables, for example, to
programmed via software as a system; simulate a presence inside the home
result of the following main events A condition occurring on the
by automatically activating the
of activation, deactivation, lock or Temperature control system; shutters or the lights at certain preset
unlock: An entrance panel call or the status
times, when no one is in fact at home.
Pressure of a control pushbutton
of a camera of the video door entry A control pushbutton of the
(configured in CEN mode); system; automation system can be
Switching on and off of a light
An event of the sound system.
programmed so that when it is
(with the exception of dimmer For additional activation events refer pressed all currently active scenarios
light points); to the documentation of the device. are interrupted (Panic button).
Automatic operation activation
Following these events, MH200N
(shutter movement); can control the MyHOME system
An event managed using one of
applications.
the nine auxiliary channels; The execution of a conditioned
An certain hour or date;
scenario combined with a set time
EXAMPLES OF SCENARIOS
Below are some examples of
scenarios that can be set using the
MH202 device.
automazione diffusione sonora
actuators
Scenario 1 – Returning home:
When the burglar-alarm is disarmed, at daytime the shutters go up but the
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto term
lights stay off; at night time the lights come on but if closed the shutters
remain closed.
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
actuators
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www ir

TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
actuators
Scenario 2 - Garden lights:
Following the activation
automazione of the
diffusione control device,
sonora antifurto everytermoregolazione
evening at 20.00 o’clock,
videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
or when the light sensor detects that outside is dark, all the lights of the
garden come on automatically.
A= 1
PL= 1
M= CEN
actuators
Light
13 14
sensor
automazione
sonora antifurto
diffusione sonora termoregolazi
antif
Scenario 3 - Energy saving: TV/SAT TV/SAT IPTV IPTV
Following a room control (A=2) for the opening of the shutters, if the light
A= 2
sensor detects that it is daytime, the scenario automatically turns off all the
lights of that room.
actuators
automazione
sonora diffusione
antifurto sonora termoregolazione
antifurto videocitofonia
termoregolazione controllo
videocitofonia lan
controllo controllo carichi
lan energia
controllo carichi luci
energia tvcc luci wwwtvcc irrigazione
A= AMB A= 2
PL= 2
automazione automazione
diffusione sonora diffusione sonora termoregolaz
antifurto antif
Light
actuators
sensor
TV/SAT TV/SAT IPTV IPTV
Scenario 4 - Relax: TV/SAT
The control device can be used to lower the shutters, adjust the dimmer lights
at 20%, and activate the sound system in the desired room.
automazione
sonora diffusione
antifurto sonora termoregolazione
antifurto videocitofonia
termoregolazione controllo
videocitofonia lan
controllo controllo carichi
lan controllo
energia carichi luci
energia tvcc luci www
tvcc irrigazion
actuators
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan co
20%
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofon
A= 1
PL= 1
M= CEN

GENERAL FEATURES
Remote control devices

MyHOME offers the possibility managed are represented by simple MyHOME_Web PORTAL
of controlling all the integrated and intuitive icons. In addition to the control made
functions of the house using a PC, a Thanks to the BUS of the MyHOME by direct connection using the
Smartphone, a fixed line telephone, system the WEB server is connected telephone or the Internet, with the
or a mobile phone. to all the functions installed inside Gateway Access devices of the home
The main condition to make the the home. Connection to the outside there is the possibility of remotely
remote control possible is the is, as already indicated, though the controlling all the MyHOME functions
presence in the home of a Web Internet. using the MyHOME_Web portal
server F454 that act as a Gateway access.
connecting the MyHOME system with In this case, by using a PC connected
Internet network. to the Internet, it will be possible to
The control is performed using interact with a virtual platform, which
any browser program to access the exchanges with the MyHOME system
particular WEB pages saved in the all the information on the status of
WEB server, where the functions to be the home automation functions of
the house.
NOTE: Web Servers, scenario programmers are

flexible devices purposely designed to enable remote
control of the various MyHOME functions using the
above modes.
For limited control needs it is possible to use the GSM
telephone activator item F462 managed only by GSM
controls.
F454 F462

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION TO THE F454 WEB SERVER USING A WI-FI CONNECTION
LAN network
Ethernet
Modem Router
TV/SAT MyHOME system BUS
IPTV
Smartphone
Telephone line
o termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc

Internet
www irrigazione
ISP
EXAMPLE
IPTV OF CONNECTION TO THE F454 WEB SERVER USING A SMARTPHONE WITH INTERNET CONNECTION
AND GPRS CONNECTION
lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Smartphone
Web Server

GENERAL FEATURES

WEB SERVER AUDIO/VIDEO F454 messages (“system in alarm status” the framing and the zoom settings
The Web server allows to manage the or “no alarm notification”). It is of the image using the PC);
MyHome home automation system also possible to receive an e-mail Listen to the audio recorded by the

through a PC, laptop, tablet or Touch message, with images attached, in microphone of the selected camera
screen, and also through mobile your mailbox, for the notification of (remote noise monitoring);
devices with a browser capable of burglar-alarm system events; Broadcast the own voice through

displaying web pages. Supervision of the electric system,
the loudspeaker associated to the
The home management can be with the reception of messages in selected camera (real time audio
performed either locally, by accessing case of tripping of the Stop&Go communication using the personal
the device via the local LAN, and device. computer);
remotely by the Web server after In addition, it is possible to perform Listen and view the messages

connection to the Internet via the following operations: recorded using the “Video door
modem. The possible functions are Real time audio and video
entry system answering machine
the following: connection to the cameras of the function”. The audio messages and
Supervision and control of the
video door entry system. the images may also be forwarded
Automation, Energy management In particular, it is possible to: by e-mail to an address.
and Temperature control systems; View the images broadcasted by

Supervision of the burglar-alarm
the selected camera (with the
system by receiving the status possibility of adjusting the image,
MyHOME FUNCTIONS WHICH CAN BE MANAGEDTV/SAT

BY THE WEB SERVER IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
Automation
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto term
automazione diffusione sonora

Burglar alarm
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
Web server
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia
Lighting
luci tvcc
Home video
energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
surveillance system
MyHOME portal Monitoring, command and

TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV control of the system by
means of web pages and/or
management programs.
a antifurto
Management
automazione and control ofsonora
termoregolazione diffusione
the MyHOME system
videocitofonia antifurtousing a termoregolazione
controllo lan
Video door entry
videocitofonia
controllo carichi
Energy management
controllo
energia lan luci controllo carichi
tvcc energiawww luci
irrigazione
personal computer or a hand-held computer, by connecting system
to the MyHOME portal through a fixed-line or mobile phone,
following a customizable voice menu.
With the activation of the MyHOME_ The Web Server can only connect As well as having the same level of
Web service, it is possible to remotely one user with the MyHome system; access as the user, the administrator
manage the home, using a PC or a this is fundamental to guarantee can also access the CONFIGURATION
hand-held PC with Internet, fixed the confidentiality, the coherence function and define certain Web
line telephone or mobile phone and the univocity of the operations Server parameters, such as the
connection. performed. number of pictures to be saved in
The Web Server can also be used as a The controls, defined during the the video door entry answering
Gateway for the virtual configuration programming of the Web server machine, the e-mail address to which
of the MyHOME devices. using the device software programs alarm signals and/or messages in
supplied, are password protected to the answering machine, login and
prevent unwanted access. password for access to the pages
Two types of users can access the as user, date, time and time zone
Web pages: and display language of the WEB
Administrator
pages. In case of control using
User.
the MyHOME_Web service, aces is
through the MyHOME portal via
double identification.
Example of control pages for the F454 Web Server
Identification
page
Control
home page
NOTE: The privacy of the information exchanged and of the pictures displayed is also guaranteed
by the SSL 128 bit protocol.

GENERAL FEATURES

WEB SERVER FOR CONNECTION
TO THE INTERNET NETWORK
To connect the MyHOME system If the ADSL modem is not equipped cable to the Wi-Fi Router modem
to the Internet and use the with “wireless” function, or it is used to connect to the Internet and
MyHOME_Web Portal, in addition to required to extend the radio signal in properly configured.
the F454 Web Server, appropriately multi-floor houses which are not For optimum use, we recommend to
configured, an ADSL modem and an equipped with LAN wired network, it allow for one “repeater” for each floor.
ADSL line are required (with fixed or is possible to use a “repeater” device.
dynamic IP). This device must be wired with a LAN
PC1
PC2
IP: 192.168.1.36
SM:255.255.225.0 IP: 192.168.1.37
SM:255.255.225.0
IP: 192.168.1.35
SM:255.255.225.0
F454
LAN
public IP
ADSL Modem IP: 192.168.1.1
Internet PC3
luci tvcc www irrigazione SM:255.255.225.0
IP: 192.168.1.38
SM:255.255.225.0

GSM telephone activator
GSM TELEPHONE ACTIVATOR

F462
It can be used to enable and disable The device can be interfaced with the
the user loads remotely, using simple BTicino timer thermostats to switch
SMS telephone messages. the system ON or OFF remotely. Using
The device is set up to have 2 alarm the L/N/NT4450 timer thermostat one
contacts. When the status of one can also interrogate the system status
of the contacts changes the device remotely and set it to a particular
sends an alarm SMS to the saved temperature.
number.
USE WITH TIMER THERMOSTAT USE FOR LOADS ON/OFF

TV/SAT IPTV
system ON-OFF
Timer thermostat light

SMS automazione diffusione sonora TV/SAT
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia
IPTV
controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
message SMS ON-OFF

message
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto Interaction

termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www ON-OFF
irrigazione
with ON-OFF system

Timer thermostat
L/N/NT4450
ALARM NOTIFICATION USE
SMS Alarms
message contact
closing

GENERAL FEATURES

ADSL GSM
FUNCTIONS PERFORMED
F454 F462
Automation
- ON/OFF lighting
Control of single electric loads
- Shutter UP/DOWN
Burglar alarm
Energy management
Video monitoring system

max 96 cameras (connecting the F454 to a 2 wire digital video door entry system)
Display the pictures in black and white and color
Temperature control Switching on and off

remotely
Sending e-mail messages following intrusions and technical alarm
Sending an SMS following specific events, request for current status, alarms
Only with MyHOME portal
Sending voice calls in case of intrusion and technical alarm
Sending e-mail with attachment in case of intrusion and technical alarm
Video door entry system answering machine: saving and sending the message and
pictures recorded by the entrance panel by e-mail
Forwarding of mail following Stop&Go events

MyHOME_Web
MyHOME_Web is a virtual platform Installer area:
Customer area:

created by BTicino to offer innovative intended for the My Home solely intended for customers
services to all Customers that have installers which can register their interested in the remote
a MY HOME system equipped own systems. Following customer’s management of their system.
with BTicino devices for remote request, it is also possible to This service, active since 2003,
connection. activate the Remote Assistance enables remote control of all the
The platform is mainly divided in two service, which gives the possibility home automation functions of
distinct areas: of remotely monitoring the home the MyHOME system, making
of the customer, and receive real available exclusive services that
time notifications in case of faults. are only possible through the web
portal (danger notifications, web
scenarios, etc.).
MyHOME portal
CUSTOMER AREA
(Remote
management)
INSTALLER AREA
(Remote assistance)
CONNECTION SAFETY AND

PROTECTION
In developing the MyHOME_Web These solutions provide high levels of:
portal, BTicino has paid special Confidentiality: protection of data

attention to ensuring high levels of from unauthorized access;
protection of the data transferred Integrity: safeguard of the

through the network from unwanted accuracy and completeness of the
access. information;
The most stringent protection criteria Accessibility: guarantee that

have therefore been implemented, both data and information will be
like: available when required.
The use of the special https
In recognition of the high safety
protocol, which makes any level offered by the connection with
information being transferred the MyHOME_Web portal, BTicino
through the line unreadable at the obtained the ISO27001 “Information
origin; technology - Security management
The use of the 128 bit SSL (Secure
systems” certification.
Socket Layer) protocol, certified
by the VeriSign Certification
Authority.

GENERAL FEATURES
MyHOME_Web - Installer Area

Installers access their own dedicated Filing of the device configuration
Enabling of the system remote

area in the Installer Portal section - files and documents generated by management function for the
MyHOME section, using the personal the YouProject design software, customer.
access keys (login and password). and by the programming software Menu management and list of

Here they will find the following programs; regular maintenance activities for
services: Filing of any activities performed
the single system.
System registration;
on the system through the web;
System management web page details
DOCUMENTS THAT CAN BE

FILED
XML file generated by YouProject

Web Server configuration file

Advanced products configuration

files.
Installers that have been appointed Reception of fault notifications in

ACCESS TO THE PORTAL USING
by the Customer to provide a Remote case of: MOBILE DEVICES
assistance service, will be able to - Faulty or exhausted battery; In addition to using the browser,
ensure a highly professional remote - Device or zone in intrusion or the installer can also interact using
assistance service, consisting in the tampering alarm status; mobile devices (mobile phones
following functions: - Device in panic alarm status; and smartphones) to display the
Forwarding of diagnostic
- Loss of communication between following information:
commands to ensure correct the Burglar-alarm central unit or Customer data;

operation of certain system the Web Server, and the Portal; Customer contract and credit

devices, such as: - Temperature control system fault. situation;
- Scenario central unit and actuators Events from remotely controlled

of the Automation system; systems.
- Burglar-alarm central unit;
- Temperature control central unit;
- Web Server.
Toll-free number
NOTE: For more information or to request the activation of the Installer Area contact the Call Center, toll-free number 800.837.035
800-837035 (Monday to Friday from 8.30 a.m. to 07.00 p.m. and Saturday from 8.30 a.m. to 12.30 p.m.)

MyHOME_Web - Customer Area
Customers can check all the MyHOME the status of the home, and receive Energy Management and

comfort, functions for their own homes. prompt notification in case of gas Consumption Display
For example, they can switch the or water leaks, or burglary attempts. In order to use the MyHOME_Web
heating on, activate certain scenarios, It is possible to check and use the service, an ADSL modem/router must
monitor and store on file the following functions: be installed in the system connected
consumptions of the home and much Comfort
to Web Server art. F454.
more. Energy Management and Load

They can be informed at any time on Control
EXCLUSIVE ADVANCED SERVICE COST

FUNCTIONS PERFORMED WITH With the on-line procedure
MyHOME_Web Customers purchase one BTicino
In addition to the remote control credit, of limited duration and
of the home automation functions, renewable, which they can use to
the user can also define and use a manage their system remotely, and
range of exclusive and advanced which amount varies depending on
functions that are specifically useful the applications to control.
for ensuring a customized use of the
service (see following table).
FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION
WEB scenarios Irrespective of the presence of scenario management devices inside the home, it is possible to define web scenarios that can also be enabled by
sending SMS messages, or based on events.
Planning Creation of action sequences that activate automatically at certain times or during certain days, and repeat following a plan.
Notifications and actions Definition of the actions performed by MyHOME_Web and of the type of notifications forwarded following a system event (SMS notifications,
e-mail, etc.).
Multiple users (houses) Customization of the portal for access to several systems (several homes)
Multiple users (users) Customization of the procedure for accessing the portal depending on the user type.
Interface customization Creation of customized navigation menus, based on the needs of the user and the management device used (web browser, hand-held PC, etc.)
Event log Display of the list of the events occurred within the system

GENERAL FEATURES
MyHOME_Web - Customer Area
Page for the display of the electric consumption
Page for the display of the images recorded by

the camera
ACCESS MODE USING MOBILE

DEVICES
In addition to web access, possible Smartphone access
using a PC with web browser Through an APP dedicated to iOS
connected to the Internet, the and Android devices, it is possible
customer can communicate with to manage all functions of the
the Portal using other channels MyHOME_Web portal directly
taking advantage of mobility, such from your Smartphone. The native
as mobile phones and smartphones. application, if properly configured,
The functions that can be performed allows to receive PUSH notifications
with each mode of connection are to know the system status in real
the following: time. The application is free to
download from Apple Store and
Access using SMS messages Google Play; to use it simply enter
It is possible to activate a scenario your credentials (username and
through SMS messages. password).
The creation of the scenarios and the
association to the SMS message is
performed during the Customer Area
customization stage.
By sending SMS messages it is also
possible to know the status of the
devices.

System layout for the use of the MyHOME_Web services
CONTROL DEVICES With the F454 Web Server it is
In order to use the MyHOME_Web possible to establish real time
services, it will be necessary to install communication at any time, using
a F454 Web Server connected to the the MyHOME system of the home.
MyHOME system. A necessary condition for ensuring
the above is the availability of an
ADSL line with dynamic or static
IP, and the use of an ADSL modem
router, appropriately configured
using the parameters for connection
to the LAN network and the Portal.
MyHOME portal
Note (*): item 3486, 3485, 3485STD
TV/SAT IPTV
Internet
IP WAN: fixed or dynamic
(depending on the type of contract)
eocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Web Server F454

IP: 192.168.1.35 IP_LAN: 192.168.1.1
NM: 255.255.255.0 NM: 255.255.255.0
LAN NETWORK
192.168.1.x
255.255.255.0
PC 01 PC 02 PC 03

GENERAL FEATURES
MyHOME_Web – Creation and configuration of the

Customer Area
PREREQUISITES OPERATION FLOW
A fundamental requirement for the the specific link on the home page The operations to follow for the
creation of the customer area is the of the Installer Area. The procedure configuration and activation of the
availability of the XML configuration can also be performed by a Technical Customer area consist of two stages:
file of the system, generated by the After Sale Service (CAT). Operations to be performed using

project and configuration program the Internet in the “Installer Area”;
YouProject or by the MyHOME_ Operation for the configuration of

WebConfig tool. the control devices in the MyHOME
For the creation of a Customer area, system.
it will be necessary for the installer
to have a personal “Installer Area”
enabled inside the MyHOME_Web
portal. For details on the procedure
refer to the “User Manual Installers
Area” which can be downloaded by
First level Second

menu level menu
Installer user
name
Sidebar
Functional
pushbuttons
Operating area

operations to be performed in the Installer Area
1. System registration;
Configuration of the TCP/IP CHANNEL
2. Loading of the XML file for the
configuration of the system in the
System documents area;
3. Entering of the parameters of
the control devices (web server) in
the “Devices” section, as explained
below:
3.1 The use of the Web Server
shall be specified by entering
the following parameters:
OPEN password;

Type of connection: DYNAMIC

IP ADSL, STATIC IP ADSL or WAC
(Web Server Active Connection); Configuration of the DTMF PSTN CHANNEL
“Internal IP” address associated

to the control device;
Number of the port used for

sending the controls;
Number of the port used for

receiving;
Password for camera images.

4. Saving of the page for the creation
of the GATEWAY ID data;
5. Enabling of the REMOTE
MANAGEMENT function in the
“Available functions” section.
The Customer will receive an email Configuration of the parameters for Energy Management devices
containing the link necessary for the
on-line acceptance of the contract.
6. Configuration, if required, of
the Energy Management devices
installed in the system, by entering
the corresponding parameters in the
specific sections.
Note: For the detailed list of the parameters to configure, refer to the documentation available from the
www.myhome-bticino.it website

GENERAL FEATURES
MyHOME_Web - Creation of the customer area:

operations to be performed on the control devices
WEB SERVER F454 Ethernet page
Configure the device using the

MyHOME_Suite program, entering
the following data:
ETHERNET PAGE
The IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Router IP fields are already filled. In
this page it will be necessary to enter
the router IP as primary DNS (normally
192.168.1.1), and the DNS supplied
by the ADSL Internet provider as the Gateway ID Connection
secondary DNS. Also specify the type MyHome portal page parameters
of address (fixed or DHCP), and set the

UPnP IGD function.
MyHOME PORTAL PAGE

In this page perform the following
operations:
1. Enable portal access.
2. In the GATEWAY ID field enter
the GATEWAY ID code generated
automatically during the
configuration of the control device.
Authentication page
3. Select the type of connection:
Fixed IP: In case of fixed IP ADSL

subscription (normally in case of
business customers);
Dynamic Ip: In case of dynamic

IP ADSL subscription (the most
common one);
“Web Server Active Connection”

(W.A.C.) in case of private
networks, where the system
cannot be directly reached by the
Internet (e.g.: Fastweb), or of non-
configurable router.
4. Check the default connection
parameters:
MyHOME_Web address:

portal.myhomeweb.it
MHWEB email:

mhe.pro@myhomeweb.it
SMTP Server address:

smtp.myhomeweb.it

AUTHENTICATION PAGE MODEM ROUTER
Check that the OPEN password In addition to the settings for the
entered in the portal when creating connection to the ADSL line and for the
the system registration is aligned LAN NETWORK of the home, this device
with the password entered into the
must also be correctly natted following
webserver.
the table shown on the manual which
can be downloaded from the home
page of the Installers Area.
ADSL Modem

WIRING DIAGRAMS
AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTEGRATION

WITH THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM AND FUNCTIONS REMOTE CONTROL
The system includes a Local Display the Touch Screen is configured

and a Touch Screen. using the software and is capable
the Local Display is configured
of managing all the functions
for the management of the present, and the scenarios saved in PC with MHVISU-
temperature control and is the scenario module. AL software
associated to the sensor

(ZA = 0, ZB = 1)
ADSL line with

ZA = - fixed IP
ZA = - ZB = 1
ZB = 2 A =1 N1 = 1 Modem Router/Switch
A =1 MOD = SLA PL1 = 2 ZB2 = OFF A =-
PL = 1 SLA = 1 PL2 = 2 N2 = - PL = 1
Direct Ethernet
cable
F411U1 4695 F411U2 F430/2 F420 ETHERNET
E46ADCN 18.0°C F454

23.7°C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
F430/2 F420
C OK
C1 C2 DEL
SCS AI SCS AV
230 Vac
BUS SCS
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 HS4693 HS4891 H4890

ON
GEN
OFF
A1 = GEN A1 = 1 A1 = 1 ZA = - ZA = -
PL1 = - PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 ZB = 1 ZB = 1
M1 = O/I M1 = M1 = - MOD = SLA MOD = 1
A2 = - A2 = - A2 = 2 SLA = 1 FUN = 4
PL2 = - PL2 = - PL2 = 1
M2 = - M2 = - M2 = O/I
ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

F420 Scenario module 1
E46ADCN Power supply 1
F430/2 DIN Actuator 1
F415 Dimmer 1
F411U1 1 relay DIN actuator 1
F411U2 2 relays DIN actuator 1
H4652/2 Control 3
HS4891 Local Display 1
H4890 MyHOME_Screen 1
H4693 Temperature control probe 1
H4695 Temperature control central unit 1
F454 Web Server 1

252 MyHOME Catalogue
MyHOME Catalogue
Catalogue MyHOME 253

MyHOME
FEATURES OF THE RANGE
Thanks to the MyHOME technology, it is possible to
design electrical systems with new and more advanced
performance in terms of comfort, safety, energy saving,
audio/video communication and local and remote
control.
MyHOME is based on the use of the digital BUS
technology applicable in any residential, small service
and similar context. The system is expandable in every
moment and it can be integrated with systems and
devices of different manufacturers and with different
communication protocols.
Lights and rolling shutter automation

Burglar alarm
Temperature control
Sound system
Consumption and load control displaying
Local and remote control
Video door entry system
Structured cabling system for the home sector
ELIOT is the name of the dedicated BTicino program

to the connected objects (Internet of Things) that
identifies all those products or systems which, thanks to
the possibility
to connect to the Internet, add value
in terms of functionality, information, interactions
PROGRAM BY BTICINO
with the environment and use.
INTEGRATION AND CONTROL
N4891 AM4890 MH4892C
Item LOCAL DISPLAY Item IP TOUCH SCREEN ADAPTER

1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous 3496 Accessory to be used with TOUCH SCREEN - for
management of max 4 functions: Sound System, audio content playback from the PC, server
Temperature control, Consumption display, Load or audio content over IP (e.g. radio) using the
management, Scenarios - 2 modules speakers present in the Sound System - installed
HD4891 Axolute on the back of the TOUCH SCREEN
HC4891
HS4891
MHVISUAL SOFTWARE
N4891 Livinglight MHVISUAL Supervision software for the functions
NT4891 of Lighting, Automation, Burglar alarm,
L4891 Temperature control, Sound System, Scenarios,
TOUCH SCREEN Energy Management and CCTV systems
3.5” color Touch Screen for the management of MYHOME_SCREEN 10
the following functions: Automation, Lighting, Touch Screen with 10” capacitive LCD screen
MH4893C
Burglar alarm, Temperature control, Sound System, MH4892C 1280x800:
Scenarios, Load management and Consumption - management of MyHOME, NUVO and Video door
display. Front USB connector for configuration. entry system functions
Device prearranged for programming with Open - navigation by rooms
Web Net protocol language. - management of multimedia content via USB,
H4890 Axolute SD Card, LAN or IP network
Supplied with installation support with Air - management of customized profiles
22°C
Axolute cover plates - possibility of customizing background images
LN4890 Livinglight wall mounted installation with 506E flush
LN4890A Livinglight mounted box. Available in white and in black. No
installable with LIVINGLIGHT AIR cover plates - need for additional surround plate
AM4890 Màtix
The MyHOME system can also be controlled by iPad devices

thanks to BTicino MyHOME, the official BTicino application which : devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the
can be downloaded from iTunes, in the “Free” version as well development of integration applications
MyHOME 255
NOTE: White color device Tech color device Anthracite color device Neutral item
INTEGRATION AND CONTROL
F422 F429 3486 F454

MH202
Item SCS-SCS INTERFACE Item CENTRAL UNIT WITH TELEPHONE COMMUNICATOR

F422 Interface between systems based on SCS BUS 3485STD Standard burglar alarm central unit with system self-
dedicated to functions different to each other - 2 learning function and viewing of the configuration
shallow DIN modules on the display. Controlled using the transponder
INTERFACE FOR DIFFERENT SYSTEMS
and keypad. Management of up to 72 zones, up to 8
areas and possibility to define up to 16 scenarios of
F426 SCS/EIB interface - to control EIB systems from
use. Equipped with PSTN telephone communicator
MyHOME systems - 2 DIN modules
for sending the alarms and two local contacts.
Programmable using the TiSecurityStandard
SCS/DALI INTERFACE application. Wall installation with metallic bracket
F429 Dimmer DALI, 8 independent outputs with supplied as standard. Battery powered, using
maximum load 16 ballast at 230 Va.c., button for battery item 3506, supplied as standard.
load direct control - 6 DIN modules 3486 Central unit with system self-learning function
OPEN-BACNET INTERFACE OK
and viewing of the configuration on the display.
Interface for control via TouchScreen of the Controlled using the IR remote control, transponder
F450
Bacnet devices like Fancoil, AC, ATU, VAV units, and keypad. Management of up to 72 zones,
underfloor heating - 6 DIN modules up to 8 areas and possibility to define up to 16
scenarios of use. Equipped with PSTN telephone
DRIVER MANAGER communicator and integrated GSM for sending
F459 Integration platform to third-party systems - 6 the alarms. Programmable using the TiSecurity
DIN modules GSM application. Wall mounting with metal
bracket supplied as standard or flush-mounted in
To check the feasibility of specific integrations and to apply for the necessary MULTIBOX boxes. Battery powered, using battery
license for using the Driver manager contact the specialists of the "BTicino item 3507/6, not supplied.
Systems Integration Service toll free number 800.837035.
WEB SERVER AUDIO/VIDEO
SCENARIO MODULE F454 Audio/Video Web Server for remote control of the
F420 Device to store 16 scenarios for Automation, system through web pages or MyHOME PORTAL
Sound System, Temperature control and Video AND RELATIVE APP. The device can operate as a
Door Entry applications - 2 DIN modules gateway for using the MHVisual and MyHOME_
Suite software - 6 DIN modules.
SCENARIO PROGRAMMER GSM TELEPHONE ACTUATOR
MH202 Device for the execution of scenarios programmed F462 GSM telephone actuator for 2 loads activation/
with MYHOME_Suite software. The scenario deactivation via SMS. It allows to interact with the
can be combined with times, dates, manual programmable BTicino chronothermostats item
activations, events managed on AUX channels or L/N/NT4450 and to manage 2 alarm inputs - 4 DIN
generated in Automation, Temperature Control modules
and Burglar Alarm systems - 6 DIN modules.
SWITCH
F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs - 5 ports for the distribution
of 1 LAN line in 4 lines. Possibility to add more
switches to have more lines - Power supply by
power supply device item F552 - 4 DIN modules.
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the

development of integration applications
256 MyHOME
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
H4651M2 H4652 L4652/2 AM5832/3
Item CONTROL FOR SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Item CONTROLS FOR SINGLE AND DOUBLE LOADS
Special control - it allows to drive an actuator Control which can drive a single actuator for
performing all the standard functions of a single loads or for double loads or two actuators
control and some special functions: activation for single or double loads independent to each
of 4 scenarios saved in the item F420 module, other - to be completed with 1 two-module
timings, activation of an actuator installed on a key cover for controls with one or two functions
different bus from the control, selection of the or 2 one-module key covers with one or two
fixed adjustment level and the dimmer softstart functions - 2 modules
and soft-stop speed, sound system, door lock Axolute
H4652/2
operation control, call to the floor control,
switching ON staircase lights and management L4652/2 Livinglight
of auxiliary channels. To be completed with 1 or AM5832/2 Màtix
2-module key covers with one or two functions - Control which can drive three actuators for single
2 modules loads or for double loads independent to each other
H4651M2 Axolute - to be completed with 3 one-module key cover for
L4651M2 Livinglight controls with one or two functions - 3 modules
AM5831M2 Màtix H4652/3 Axolute
Control with 8 KEYS for light management, shutters L4652/3 Livinglight
automation, sound system and scenario control - AM5832/3 Màtix
SCS-BUS connection - dimensions: 2 modules
SHUTTERS MANAGEMENT CONTROL
H4652 Axolute
2 module flush mounted control with reduced
LN4652 Livinglight thickness equipped with 3 button. In addition
to the monostable and bistable UP/DOWN
A5 sheets to customize the control symbols of items functions the device prepares the shutters in a
H4652 and LN4652. stored position (PRESET)
The sheets can be customized using the tool in the Axolute
H4660M2
MyHOME_Suite configuration software. designed to operate only with advanced
3541 black actuators H4661M2 and F401 specific for the
3542 device management of shutters.
LN4660M2 Livinglight
designed to operate only with advanced
actuators LN4661M2 and F401 specific for the
management of shutters.
AM5860M2 Màtix
designed to operate only with advanced
actuators AM5860M2 and F401 specific for the
management of shutters
HOME AUTOMATION HINGE
4911TDM Livinglight
accessory to install the 2-module key cover on devices
installed in 503E boxes
NOTE ON THE USE OF THE HOME HINGE ITEM 4911TDM
new support
3-module LIVING/LIGHT
home automation
hinge
item 4911TDM
control key
control 2 modules
key cover
control key 2 modules
1 module
key cover
1 module
MyHOME 257
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
HD4657M3 HS4657M3 HD4653M2 NT4607 L4680 AM5787/4
Item DIGITAL GLASS CONTROLS Item SOFT TOUCH CONTROL

Axolute Touch control for the implementation and/
MyHOME control for the control of single loads or adjustment of a single actuator or a single
or load groups (e.g. lights and shutters), sound scenario stored in the scenario module item
system, basic audio door entry functions (e.g. gate F420, adjustable led intensity
opening). The configuration can be completed HD4653M2 Axolute
in two separate ways: physical (connecting HC4653/2 2 modules
the physical configurators to their sockets), or HS4653/2
virtual (the control can be configured remotely). HD4653M3 Axolute
It is fitted with capacitive touch keys that can be HC4653/3 3 modules
identified using adjustable intensity LEDs. HS4653/3
SCENARIO CONTROL
WHITE GLASS
6 key control – 3 module size Customizable scenarios command to control 4
HD4657M3
independent Automation, Temperature Control or
Sound System "environmental conditions" stored
8 key control – 4 module size in the F420 scenario module - 2 modules
HD4657M4
HD4680 Axolute
HC4680
HS4680
WHICE
N4680 Livinglight
HC4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size
NT4680
L4680
HC4657M4 8 key control – 4 module size SCENARIO MODULE
F420 Device to store 16 scenarios for Automation,
Sound System, Temperature control and Video
NIGHTER Door Entry applications
HS4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size - 2 DIN modules
CODE PROTECTED CONTROL
HS4657M4 8 key control – 4 module size Device that is used to store up to 30 transponders
(badges) for the implementation of protected
controls - 2 modules
HD4607 Axolute
NOTE: for white glass controls, contact your local BTicino commercial
HC4607
representative for availability. HS4607
DIGITAL GLASS CONTROL INSTALLATION N4607 Livinglight
Box Support Control NT4607
Box 503E H4703 HD4657M3 L4607
HC4657M3
HS4657M3 AM5787 Màtix
504E H4704 HD4657M4 Scenarios control protected with transponder -
HC4657M4 it is used to store up to 30 transponders (badges)
HS4657M4 for controlling 4 protected scenarios - 2 modules
HD4607Z4 Axolute
Support HC4607/4
HS4607/4
N4607/4 Livinglight
NT4607/4
L4607/4
AM5787/4 Màtix
Control
258 MyHOME
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
3530S 3540 NT4654N 3529
Item TRANSPONDER Item KIT - SHUTTER AUTOMATION

3530S nde
r
Portable badge - when it is moved close to the MHKIT1013 Solution for shutters automation.
transponder reader, it activates it allowing the
spo
It is used to control 5 shutters or motorized

tran
TY
EC URI
H S
HIG
signal generated on the BUS to be transferred curtains, or mixed solutions of shutters and
- no need for batteries for power supply - curtains, with individual controls and general
automatically coded through the transponder control. The kit is composed of:
reader • 1 power supply item E49
3540 As above - key-ring • 1 rolling shutter control item LN4660M2
• 5 rolling shutter actuators item LN4661M2
• key covers with UP/DOWN and STOP symbols
Warning: only controls with production batch 03W18 or higher can read items 3530S • various configurators.
(slim badge) and 3540 (key-rings). The older readers only work with item 3530 (badge). It can be expanded with other equal actuators
and integrated with other MyHOME functions.
CONTACT INTERFACE LIVINGLIGHT design (White, Tech, Anthracite
Basic module command interface with 2 finishing elements)
3477
independent contacts for the control of 2 KIT - LIGHT AND SHUTTER AUTOMATION
actuators for single-function loads or for the MHKIT1114 Solution for controlling 6 shutters or 6 lights and
control of 1 actuator for double function loads 3 shutters or 12 light points with overall controls
(shutters) - it accepts two traditional input and individual controls.
switches or traditional pushbuttons with NO and Possibility to store the shutter position. The kit is
NC contact or a traditional switch or interlocked composed of:
buttons • 1 power supply item E49
F428 As above - 2 DIN modules • 1 shutters control item L4652/2
• 6 rolling shutter actuators item LN4671M2
• various configurators. To be completed with
MEMORY MODULE LIVINGLIGHT key covers. Expandable with other
F425 Module to store the actuators status - to restore MyHOME devices sharing the BUS cable item
the lights automation system in case of power L4669.
failure - 2 shallow DIN modules Note: The package does not include the following items, to be purchased
separately:
- cable (twisted pair with sheath) item L4669 sold in coils of 100 meters;
ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS - flush mounted or wall mounted boxes, and finishing cover plates of LIVINGLIGHT series.
Receiver for remote control through remote
control device 3529 - up to 16 activations or RADIO INTERFACES FOR EXTENSION
scenarios stored in the scenario moduleF420 and BUS SYSTEM
scenario programmer MH202- 2 modules SCS / ZigBee interface for the integration of radio
HD4654 Axolute control devices into the MyHome system. Power
HC4654 supply 27 Vd.c. from BUS - 2 flush mounted
HS4654 modules.
N4654N Livinglight HD4578 Axolute
NT4654N HC4578
L4654N HS4578
AM5834 Màtix N4578N Livinglight
NT4578N
IR REMOTE CONTROL L4578N
3529 Device for receivers control (up to 16 in the same
environment) - 16 directly selectable channels -
power supply by battery type (AAA) 2 x 1.5 V.
MyHOME 259
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
HD4658 L4658N AM5659 BMSE3001 BMSE3003 0 488 34
Item GREEN SWITCH AND PIR SENSOR Item LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS

Green Switch: dual technology presence sensor, BMSE3001 SCS passive infrared sensor suitable for
passive infrared and ultrasound (PIR + US), movement and lighting level detection, flush
suitable for the presence detection in the work mounted in the ceiling with springs or flush-
areas (offices, meeting rooms). Equipped with mounted box, surface installation by surface
manual on/off switch. Mode of operation installation box item 048875, degree of
protection IP20, connection with terminals and
(automatic or manual), delay time (from 5s RJ45, 8 m diameter coverage area (50 square
to 59min) and brightness threshold (from 20 meters) and 2.5 m installation height, maximum
to 1275 lux) settable by means of advanced/ installation height of 6 m, power supply
basic configuration remote control (BMSO4001/ 27 V d.c. by Bus, absorption 12 mA, adjustment
BMSO4003), physical or virtual configuration. 2 using basic/advanced remote control (BMSO4003
modules and BMSO4001) or through configuration
HD4658 Axolute software, of the lighting level from 5 lux to 1275
HC4658 lux, of the delay time from 30 s to 255 h and of
HS4658 the main operating parameters, equipped with a
button for the Push&Learn procedure
N4658N Livinglight
NT4658N
L4658N BMSE3003 SCS dual technology sensor: passive infrared and
ultrasound, suitable for presence and lighting
AM5658 Màtix level detection flush mounted in the ceiling with
Green Switch: passive infrared motion sensor springs or flush-mounted box, surface installation
(PIR), suitable for motion detection in traffic by surface installation box item 048875, degree
areas (hallways, bathrooms, utility rooms). Mode of protection IP20, connection with terminals
of operation (automatic or manual), delay time and RJ45, 8 m diameter infrared coverage area
(from 5s to 59min) and brightness threshold (from (50 square meters) for 2.5 m installation height,
20 to 1275 lux) settable by means of advanced/ 11 m diameter infrared coverage area (95 square
meters) and 2.5 m installation height, maximum
basic configuration remote control (BMSO4001/ installation height of 6 m, power supply
BMSO4003), physical or virtual configuration. 2 27 V d.c. by Bus, absorption 17 mA, adjustment
modules using basic/advanced remote control (BMSO4003
HD4659 Axolute and BMSO4001) or through configuration
HC4659 software, of the lighting level from 5 lux to 1275
HS4659 lux, of the delay time from 30 s to 255 h and of
N4659N Livinglight the main operating parameters, equipped with a
NT4659N button for the Push&Learn procedure
L4659N
AM5659 Màtix 048834 Passive Infrared IP55 movement sensor (PIR),
suitable for movement detection in outdoor or
Management of lighting level depending on the presence of UP TO indoor traffic areas (hallways, cellars, Corselli
people and the level of natural light: this means maximum
visual comfort for the users, and a big contribution to energy 55%
SAVINGS
box). Coverage area: 140° x 15m at 2.5m height.
Mode of operation (automatic or manual),
savings. In the service sector, savings up to 55% are possible. in compliance with
EN15193 standard delay time (from 5s to 59min) and brightness
threshold (from 20 to 1275 lux) settable by
means of advanced/basic configuration remote
control (BMSO4001/BMSO4003), physical or
virtual configuration. Installation on wall or
angle through a special accessory item 048971
DIAGRAM OF USE OF THE GREEN SWITCH ITEM L/N/NT4658N ECO MODE

Control Manual load switching on and automatic switching off by the
Power supply Green Switch Dimmer item F416U1 dimmer/actuator, based on the detection of movement and the
item L4658N lighting level detected by the switch, item L4658N. The function
of the switch is mainly to activate the automatism of the dimmer/actuator: on
first pressure the sensor compares the desired light level with the actual light
level inside the room, and decides if the lights must be switched on or not. A
second pressure of the control, if desired, will force the switching on or off of the
Lighting devices automatism set by the dimmer/actuator.
230 Va.c. 2 BUS

260 MyHOME
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
H4671M2 LN4671M2 AM5851M2
BMSO4001 BMSO4003
Item CONFIGURATION REMOTE CONTROL Item ACTUATORS AND FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS/
BMSO4001 Advanced Configuration remote control equipped with DIMMERS
infrared transmitter and receiver, it is used to adjust the Actuator/control with 2 independent relays - for
main operating parameters of: Switch Sensor, Green Switch single, double or mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A
and SCS compatible sensors. Equipped with visual display incandescent lamps, 500 W for motor reducers,
for the acquisition of the parameters set on the sensors and 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for ferromagnetic transformers and
their modification, batteries charging through mini USB 70 W fluorescent lamps - relay logic interlock
port through configuration. The device can be
BMSO4003 Basic configuration remote control equipped with infrared configured also to manage a remote actuator - 2
transmitter and receiver, it is used to adjust the main modules
operating parameters of: Switch Sensor, Green Switch and H4671M2 Axolute
SCS compatible sensors. It allows editing the parameters LN4671M2 Livinglight
only to preset values, batteries recharging not available AM5851M2 Màtix
1 relay actuator with control-key - for single
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES loads: 6 A resistive or incandescent lamps, 2 A
048875 Box for surface ceiling installation, compatible with the cosϕ 0.5 for ferromagnetic transformers and
sensors: BMSE3001 and BMSE3003, degree of protection 150 W fluorescent lamps - to be completed
IP20, dimensions Ø 100 x 50 mm with 2-module key covers for single or double
048971 Accessory for angle installation, compatible with the sensor function - 2 modules
048834, degree of protection IP42, dimensions (hxwxd) 115 H4671/1 Axolute
x 75 x 40 mm L4671/1 Livinglight
AM5851/1 Màtix
FEATURES OF LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS

SCS SENSORS 048834 BMSE3001 BMSE3003
INSTALLATION wall ceiling flush-mounted
TYPE OF OPERATION AUTO/ECO/WALKTHROUGH AUTO/ECO/WALKTHROUGH
SENSOR TECHNOLOGY PIR PIR PIR+US
POWER SUPPLY 27 V d.c. from Bus 27 V d.c. from Bus
DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP55 IP20
COVERAGE AREA AT 2.5 m 15 m x 6 m Ø8m Ø 11 m
COVERING ANGLES (v/h) 45°/140° 90/360°
LIGHTING LEVEL 5 lux - 1275 lux 5 lux - 1275 lux
SWITCH OFF DELAY 5 s 59 min 59 h 30 s - 255 h 59 min 59 sec
FACTORY SETTINGS 300 lux - 15 minutes 300 lux - 15 minutes
TYPE OF CONNECTION SCS terminal RJ45 connector
Management of lighting level depending on the presence of people and the level of natural light: this means maximum visual comfort for UP TO
the users, and a big contribution to energy savings. In the service sector, savings up to 55% are possible. 55%
SAVINGS
in compliance with
EN15193 standard
MyHOME 261
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
H4678 L4678 3475 F401
Item ACTUATORS AND FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS/DIMMERS Item ACTUATORS FOR SHUTTER MANAGEMENT
Dimmer actuator for incandescent lamps and Flush mounted 2 module actuator with 2
ferromagnetic transformers - 60 - 300 VA internal relays and 4 buttons. In addition to the
230 Va.c. - to be completed with 2-module key monostable and bistable UP/DOWN functions
cover for single or double function - 2 modules the actuator prepares the shutters in a stored
H4678 Axolute position (PRESET)
L4678 Livinglight H4661M2 Axolute
to match with the control devices H4660M2
LN4661M2 Livinglight
BASIC MODULE ACTUATORS
to match with the control devices LN4660M2
3475 1 relay actuator - for single loads: 2 A resistive Màtix
AM5861M2
or incandescent lamps and 2 A cos ϕ0.5 for to match with the control devices AM5860M2
ferromagnetic transformers - suitable for
F401 as above - with 3 pushbuttons for local control - 2
installation in ceiling light cups or in flush
DIN modules
mounted boxes behind the control devices.
3476 1 relay actuator - for single loads: 2 A resistive
or incandescent lamps, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers - accepts as input a
traditional pushbutton with NO contact

Actuators Type
Incandescent and halogen LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic Ferromagnetic Motor reducers for
lamps lamps 1) lamps transformers3) transformers 2) 3) shutters 4)
energy saving
H/L4671M2 2 A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
AM5851M2 460 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W 460 VA 460 W
H/L4671/1 6A 150 W 0.65 A 150 W 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 -
AM5851/1 1380 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W 460 VA -
H/L4678 0.25 - 1.30 A - - - - 0.25 - 1.30 A -
60 - 300 W - - - - 60 - 300 VA -
3475 2A 40 W - 40 W - 2 A cosφ 0.5 -
3476 460 W Max 1 lamp - Max 1 lamp - 460 VA -
H/L4661M2 - - - - - - 2 A 250 Va.c.
AM5861M2
F401
Notes:
2) In order to calculated the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a
dimmer to a 100 VA ferromagnetic transformer with 0.8 performance, the actual load power will be 125 VA.
3) The transformer must be loaded at its rated power, or in any case never below 90% of its rated power. It will be preferable to use a single transformer, rather than several transformers
in parallel. For example, it will be preferable to use one single 250 VA transformer with 5 x 50 W spotlights connected, rather than using 5 x 50 VA transformers in parallel, with one 50
W spotlight each.
262 MyHOME
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
F411U1 F411U2 F411/4 F411/1NC BMSW1002 BMSW1003

Item ACTUATORS FOR CENTRALIZATIONS Item ACTUATORS FOR CENTRALIZATIONS
F411U1 Two-way 1 relay actuator - for single loads: BMSW1002 ON/OFF actuator, 2 independent outputs with
16 A resistive, 10 A incandescent lamps, 4 A maximum 16 A at 230 Va.c., connection to
cosϕ0.5 for ferromagnetic transformers and 4 terminal RJ45, degree of protection IP20, power
A for fluorescent lamps - equipped with zero supply 100/240 Va.c. 50/60 Hz power supply,
crossing technology - 2 DIN modules buttons for the load direct control - zero-crossing
F411U2 Actuator with 2 independent relays - for function - 4 DIN modules
single and double loads: 10 A resistive and 6 A BMSW1003 ON/OFF actuator, 4 independent outputs with
incandescent lamps, 500 W for motor reducers, maximum 16 A at 230 Va.c., connection to
2 A cosϕ 0.5 for ferromagnetic transformers and terminal RJ45, degree of protection IP20, power
250 W fluorescent lamps - relay logic interlock supply 100/240 Va.c. 50/60 Hz power supply,
through configuration - equipped with zero buttons for the load direct control - zero-crossing
crossing technology - 2 DIN modules function - 6 DIN modules
F411/4 Actuator with 4 independent relays - for BMSW1005 ON/OFF actuator, “Zero Crossing” technology, 8
single, double or mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A independent maximum load outputs 16 A at 230
incandescent lamps, 500 W for motor reducers, V a.c., terminal connection, degree of protection
2 A cosϕ 0.5 for ferromagnetic transformers and IP20, power supply 100/240 V a.c. 50/60 Hz
70 W fluorescent lamps - relay logic interlock power supply, buttons for the load direct control
through configuration - 2 DIN modules - 10 DIN modules
F411/1NC Actuator with 1 NC two-way relay for single loads
16A resistive, 10A for incandescent lamps and 4A
for fluorescent lamps. When the device is powered
on, it is always with closed contact (ON status) and
it is open with an OFF command. In this way in
case of voltage lack from the BUS, the device will
remain in the ON status, keeping the load ON - 2
DIN modules

Actuators Type
Energy saving incandescent LED lamps Linear Compact fluorescent Electronic Ferromagnetic Motor reducers for
and halogen lamps fluorescent lamps 1) lamps transformers3) transformers 2) 3) shutters 4)
F411U1 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F411U2 10 A 250 W 4A 250 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/4 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/1NC 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
BMSW1002 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1003 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1005 16 A 2.1 A 4.3 A 5A 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 10X2X36 W 1150 VA 3680 W 3680 W -
Notes:
2) In order to calculated the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a
dimmer to a 100 VA ferromagnetic transformer with 0.8 performance, the actual load power will be 125 VA.
3) The transformer must be loaded at its rated power, or in any case never below 90% of its rated power. It will be preferable to use a single transformer, rather than several transformers
in parallel. For example, it will be preferable to use one single 250 VA transformer with 5 x 50 W spotlights connected, rather than using 5 x 50 VA transformers in parallel, with one 50
W spotlight each.
MyHOME 263
LIGHTS AND SHUTTERS
AUTOMATION
F413N BMDI1001 F414 F429 F416U1 F417U2 F418U2

Item DIMMERS FOR CENTRALIZATIONS Item MULTILOAD DIMMER FOR CENTRALIZATIONS
BMDI1001 Dimmer 1/10 V, 1 maximum output load 4.3 A at F416U1 Multiload dimmer, 1 output with maximum load
230 Va.c., connection to terminal RJ45, degree of 4.3 A at 230 Va.c., connection to terminal RJ45,
protection IP20, 6 DIN modules, power supply degree of protection IP20, power supply 100/240
100/240 Va.c. 50/60 Hz, direct load control Va.c. 50/60 Hz, direct load control
pushbutton - 6 modules pushbutton - 6 DIN modules
BMDI1002 Dimmer 1/10V, “Zero Crossing” technology, F417U2 Multi-load Dimmer, 2 maximum output load
4 maximum load outputs 4.3 A at 230 V a.c., 1.7 A at 230 Va.c., connection to terminal RJ45,
terminal connection, degree of protection IP20, degree of protection IP20, 100/240 Va.c. 50/60
100/240 V a.c. 50/60 Hz power supply, buttons Hz power supply, button for the load direct
for the load direct control - 10 DIN modules control - 6 DIN modules
F413N 1 output Dimmer for powering of fluorescent Dimmer for dimmable LED management,
F418
lamps or LED sources with 1÷10 V input for dimmable CFL compact fluorescent lamps,
single loads up to 2.5 A at 230 Va.c. - screw
energy-saving halogen lamps and 110-230 V
connection - 27 Vd.c. power supply –
absorption 30 mA - connecting up to 10 ballasts electronic transformers. 27 Vd.c. power supply,
(terminals1-2) - provided with button for load absorption 10 mA - version for fastening on DIN
direct control - DIN rail mounting version 2 rail - 4 modules
modules F418U2 Two-channel dimmer for the management of
F414 1 output Dimmer for powering LEDs, dimmable lamps, dimmable CFL compact
incandescent and halogen lamps with fluorescent lamps, halogen energy saving lamps
ferromagnetic transformer - 27 Vd.c. power and 110-230V electronic transformers. Possibility
supply - absorption 9 mA - provided with button of parallelization of the two channels to increase
for load direct control - DIN rail mounting version the maximum power which can be managed. 27
- 4 modules Vd.c. power supply, absorption 18 mA - version
F429 DALI dimmer with 8 independent outputs for for fastening on DIN rail - 4 modules
connecting up to 16 DALI ballasts each output -
power supply 230 Va.c. 50/60 Hz; 110 - 240 Vd.c.
- absorption 5 mA - provided with button for
load direct control - DIN rail mounting version - 6
modules
CONTROLLABLE LOADS (230 Va.c. 50/60 HZ)
Actuators Type
Energy saving LED lamps Linear fluorescent lamps 1) Compact fluorescent Electronic Ferromagnetic Motor reducers for
incandescent and halogen lamps lamps transformers3) transformers 2) 3) shutters 4)
BMDI1001 4.3 A - 4.3 A 4.3 A - - -
1000 VA - 1000 VA 1000 VA - - -
BMDI1002 Dimmer for ballast - four 4.3 A outputs - 4x 1000VA@ 230 Vac - 4x500VA@ 230 Vac
F413N - - 2 A 460 W 5) - - - -
- - Max. 10 ballast type T5, T8, - - - -
compact or driver for LED
F414 0.25 - 4.3 A - - - - 0.25 - 4.3 A -
60 - 1000 VA - - - - 60 - 1000 VA -
F416U1 4.3 A - - - 4.3 A 4.3 A -
40 - 1000 W - - - 40 - 1000 W 40 - 1000 W -
F417U2 1.7 A - - - 1.7 A 1.7 A -
40 - 400 W - - - 40 - 400 W 40 - 400 W -
F418 1÷300 W 1÷300 VA - 1÷300 VA 1÷300 VA - -
F418U2 2x300 W 2x300 VA - 2x300 VA 2x300 VA 2x300 VA -
F429 SCS/DALI dimmer interface - 8 x16 ballast
Notes:
1) Power factor corrected fluorescent lamps, energy saving lamps, discharge lamps. 2) In order to calculate the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary
to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a dimmer to a 100 VA ferromagnetic transformer with 0.8 performance, the actual load power will
be 125 VA. 3) The transformer must be loaded at its rated power, or in any case never below 90% of its rated power. It will be preferable to use a single transformer, rather than several
transformers in parallel. For example, it will be preferable to use one single 250 VA transformer with 5 x 50 W spotlights connected, rather than using 5 x 50 VA transformers in parallel,
with one 50 W spotlight each. 4) The symbol shown on the actuators refers to the shutter motor reducers. 5) Only compatible with lamps with 1/10 V Ballast.
264 MyHOME
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
HD4695 L4695 AM5875 3550 HS4693 N4693
H4691 HC4692FAN HC4692 N4692 AM5872
Item 4 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT Item PROBES

Central unit for the management of a Probe for controlling the room temperature
temperature control system with a maximum of for heating and cooling systems - temperature
4 zones - the package also includes the TiThermo measuring range 3-40°C
Basic software for programming from PC - 2 modules
- 3 modules HD4693 Axolute
HD4695 Axolute HC4693
HC4695 HS4693
HS4695 N4693 Livinglight
N4695 Livinglight NT4693
NT4695 L4693
L4695
KNOB SENSORS
AM5875 Màtix
Room temperature control sensor for heating
99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT and cooling systems. Equipped with knob for the
Central unit for the management of a variation of ± 3°C above the temperature set in
3550
temperature control system with a maximum the central unit and for the selection of the OFF
of 99 zones - the package also includes the and antifreeze mode - 2 modules
TiThermo software for programming from PC - HD4692 Axolute
wall mounting or in MULTIBOX containers HC4692
HS4692
BATTERY N4692 Livinglight
3507/6 6 V 0.5 Ah battery for temperature control central NT4692
unit L4692
AM5872 Màtix
THERMOSTAT FAN COIL KNOB SENSORS
Flush mounted thermostat with backlit display. Room temperature control sensor for heating
It is used to control the temperature of a single and cooling systems. Equipped with knob for the
zone, both in the presence and absence of a variation of ± 3°C above the temperature set in
temperature control unit. It is equipped with the central unit and for the selection of the OFF
a temperature probe and an input for the and antifreeze mode with of manual/automatic
connection of a contact line (e.g. window contact). speed selection for fan-coil and Idrorelax system
It allows the management of different types of - 2 modules
systems and the fan speed adjustment if fan HD4692FAN Axolute
coils are used. Possibility of automatic operation HC4692FAN
(summer/winter) with compatible systems. HS4692FAN
Connection to a SCS bus - 2 DIN modules N4692FAN Livinglight
H4691 Axolute NT4692FAN
LN4691 Livinglight L4692FAN
WIRELESS TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3455 Wireless probe for outdoor temperature
measurement - power supply by solar cells or 3.6 V
Lithium battery LS14250/1/2 - IP65 wall container.
Use with dedicated wireless receiving interface item
HC/HD/HS4577 (Axolute) or item L/N/NT4577
(Livinglight)
MyHOME 265
TEMPERATURE CONTROL - ENERGY MANAGEMENT
HC4577 L4577 3456 3523 3522N
HC4891 N4891 LN4710
Item WIRELESS RECEIVING INTERFACES FOR PROBE Item CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE
Wireless receiving interface for wireless 3480 Electromagnetic contact interface module for
temperature probe 3455 - 27 Vd.c. power supply doors or windows to turn off the zone involved
from the BUS - 2 modules - basic container
HD4577 Axolute F482 As above - 2 DIN module enclosure
HC4577
HS4577
N4577 Livinglight NOTE: for magnetic contacts see the Burglar Alarm section.
NT4577
SPLITTER MANAGEMENT INTERFACE
L4577
3456 Interface with IR emitter for air conditioning units
LOCAL DISPLAY to learn and reproduce the IR signal of remote
1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous controls for air conditioners. Controllable by
management of max 4 functions: Sound System, MyHOME_Screen 3.5" and 10". Basic mechanism,to
Temperature control, Consumption display, Load facilitate installation behind the air conditioning
management, Scenarios - 2 modules unit. IR cable length 2 m, 27 V bus power supply.
HD4891 Axolute CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
HC4891 Energy Display. Device with 1.6" display for
HS4891 showing the power supply consumption (detected
N4891 Livinglight by the devices items F520, F521, 3522N) and for
NT4891 controlling the actuators belonging to the energy
L4891 management system item F522 and item F523 - 2
modules
EXTERNAL SENSOR
H4710 Axolute
3457 Local Display external sensor
LN4710 Livinglight
F520 Device for the measurement of electric power

ACTUATORS up to maximum 3 lines connecting 3 toroids
F430/2 Actuator with 2 independent relays - for single in the dedicated inputs. The data detected and
and double loads: 6 A resistive, 2A motorized processed is visible on MyHOME_Screen 3.5" and
valves and pumps - logic relay interlock through 10". DIN rail mounting version - 1 module.
configuration - 2 DIN modules The device is supplied with 1 toroid.
F430/4 Actuator with 4 independent relays - for single, 3523 Additional toriod for electric power measurement
double or mixed loads: 4 A resistive, 1A motorized item F520 and for actuator with sensor item F522
valves, pumps and fan-coil - relays logic interlock for the differential current measurement. Cable
through configuration - 2 DIN modules length 400 mm
F430R8 Actuator with 8 independent relays for 3522N Pulse counter interface for the collection of data
controlling on-off valves, motorized valves from the meters (water, gas, etc.) with pulse
(open-close and with three points), pumps and output. The values measured can be displayed on
2 and 4 tube fan coils - 4A resistive, 1A motorized all the MyHOME user interfaces (Energy display,
valves, pumps and fan coils - connection on SCS Local display, MyHOME_Screen 3.5” and 10”).
Basic module version, for hidden installation.
bus - 4 DIN modules
Power supply from 27 V BUS.
F430R3V10 Actuator with 3 independent relays and two
0-10 Volt outputs for coils fan control 2 and 4
tubes with 0-10 Volt proportional valves - 4A
resistive, 1A fan coils - connection on SCS bus, 4
DIN modules
F430V10 Actuator with 2 independent 0-10 Volt outputs
for the control of
proportional valves 0-10 Volt - connection on SCS
bus - 2 DIN modules
266 MyHOME
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
MHKIT4015 N4672N HS4673 L4673 F521 F522 F523 F524 3508BUS
Item LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT Item LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT

MHKIT4015 This kit can be used to manage the maximum Actuator with 1 relay - 10 A for incandescent
power to be used, and automatically disconnect lamps 4 A for fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic
the least important appliances in case of overload transformers and 500 W for LED lamps and
(according to the priority set). It can be easily compact fluorescent lamps for the Automation
expanded and integrated with other My HOME and/or load control management functions. Load
functions. The kit is composed of: forced operation button - built-in version - 2
• 1 power supply item E49 modules
• 1 loads control central unit item F521 HD4672N Axolute
• 1 16A actuator with measuring sensor item F522 HC4672N
• 2 actuators item. F523 HS4672N
• 1 energy display item LN4710 N4672N Livinglight
• various configurators. NT4672N
LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT L4672N
F521 Central unit for the load control system actuators Panel for the loads connected to the actuators
management and control to prevent the risk of displaying and control
disconnection from the electricity provider. The HD4673 Axolute
center unit handles up to a maximum of 63 loads, HC4673
a contract power from 1.5 to 18 kW and tolerance HS4673
up to +/-20%. It includes a bus meter for the N4673 Livinglight
controlled line. DIN rail mounting version - 1 NT4673
module. The device is supplied with 1 toroid. L4673
F522 Actuator with integrated current sensor for the
IP DATA CONCENTRATOR - ENERGY DATA LOGGER
controlled load consumption measurement. 1 relay
- 10 A for incandescent lamps and 4A for fluorescent F524 Device for the centralization of the power
lamps or ferromagnetic transformers and consumption data, measured with F520 bus
500 W for LED lamps and compact fluorescent meters with toroids, F521 load control unit or
lamps - bistable relay with zero crossing for the 3522N pulse-counter interface. The data can be
automation and/or load control management displayed by integrated web pages connecting
functions. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module. the device to a network by the Ethernet port. It
Differential current control made possible by allows the configuration of different tariffs and the
connecting an additional toroid, item 3523 downloading of data, the addition or subtraction
1 relay actuator - for incandescent lamps, 4A for of lines as well as multiplication by a factor. The
F523
fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers device is equipped with a slot for micro SD for an
and 500 W for LED lamps and compact fluorescent additional backup of the recorded data and of the
lamps - Bistable relay with zero crossing for the OpenWebNet controls related to the consumption
Automation and/or Load control management displaying. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module -
functions. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module. Power supply from 27V BUS
ACCESSORIES
3508BUS plug-in clamp for BUS connection
- width 3.81 mm
3508U2 2 pole plug-in clamp
3508U3 3 pole plug-in clamp
MyHOME 267
COMMON DEVICES AND
ACCESSORIES
E46ADCN 335919 3559
Item POWER SUPPLIES Item VARIOUS ACCESSORIES

E46ADCN Power supply - input 230 Vac, output 27 Vd.c. SELV 3515 Spare plug-in clamp
- maximum absorbed current 450mA - version for
fastening on DIN rail for flush-mounted or wall-
mounted central units - 8 DIN modules 335919 Connecting cable to the PC for programming
E46ADCN/127 As adove - 127 Va.c. Automation, Burglar Alarm, Temperature Control and
Sound System devices - RS232 port
E49 Compact power supply - input 230 Va.c. 3559 Cable as above - for USB port
- output 27 Vd.c. - maximum power delivered
600 mA - 2 DIN modules
346020 Compact additional power supply. For local supply
of internal and external video door entry entrance
panels.
Power supply: 230 Va.c. @ 50-60 Hz. Maximum
power delivered 600 mA. Protected by integrated
fuse (not replaceable). Double insulation SELV
device - 2 DIN modules
For the selection of the power supply, based on the system being installed, refer to the following table.
System Power supply
E46ADCN E49
346020
Automation • •
Energy management/Consumption display • •
Temperature control • •
Integration and control •
268 MyHOME
COMMON DEVICES AND
ACCESSORIES
3501/0 3501/1 3501/2 3501/3 3501/4
L4669
3501/GEN 3501/GR 3501/AMB 3501/AUX
L4669/500 336904 502PA
L4669HF
Item WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR POWER SUPPLY
AND BATTERY - BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM
3501/PUL 3501/SLA 3501/CEN 3501/T
F115/8A DIN wall mounted enclosure for the installation
of power supply item E47ADCN Item VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION KIT
3504 kit for the Automation system configuration through
F115/8B container for 12V 7Ah battery for burglar alarm PC and VIRTUAL CONFIGURATOR software, supplied
system self-powering with power supply item by CD and Secure Digit (SD) memory card. It replaces
E47ADCN - self-protection contact against item 3503N.
opening attempts
CONFIGURATORS – SINGLE-TYPE PACKAGE OF
WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR MODULAR DEVICES 10 PIECES
502NPA surface box with reduced depth for wall installation 3501/0 configurator 0
- equipped with anti-tamper device - 2 modules -
fitted with support 3501/1 configurator 1
3501/2 configurator 2
ANGULAR BOX
502PA Surface box for angle installation - equipped 3501/3 configurator 3
with anti-tamper device - 2 modules - fitted with 3501/4 configurator 4
support and white cover plate (LB) 3501/5 configurator 5
3501/6 configurator 6
CONNECTION CABLES
L4669 sheathed twisted pair made up of 2 flexible wires 3501/7 configurator 7
with plaited and unshielded sheath - 300/500 V 3501/8 configurator 8
insulation - in compliance with CEI 46-5 and CEI 3501/9 configurator 9
20-20 - coil length 100 meters
3501/GEN configurator GEN
L4669/500 as above - coil length 500 meters
3501/GR configurator GR
L4669KM1 as above - coil length 1000 meters (1)
3501/AMB configurator AMB
3501/AUX configurator AUX
336904 specific cable with 2 twisted conductors. It can be 3501/ON configurator ON
installed in underground piping, in accordance
3501/OFF configurator OFF
with standards (CEI 20-13 and CEI 20-14). It
ensures the best performance in video systems 3501/OI configurator OI
(greater distance between PE and PI than using CONFIGURATORS – SINGLE-TYPE PACKAGE OF
other cables). Coil length 200 meters 10 PIECES
L4669HF as above - low toxicity halogen-free cable - ideal 3501/PUL configurator PUL
for applications in environments where there will 3501/SLA configurator SLA
be greater regard for safety in case of fire - coil configurator CEN
3501/CEN
length 200 m
3501/T configurator
➝ ➝
➝
3501/TM configurator M
➝
System Cable CONFIGURATOR KIT

L4669 336904 3501K Configurator kit from 0 to 9
L4669/500 L4669HF
L4669KM1 3501K/1 Configurator kit AUX, GEN, GR, AMB, ON, OFF, O/I,
Automation • • (2) PUL, SLA, CEN, , M
➝
➝
• •
➝
Energy management/Consumption Display (2)

Temperature control • •
NOTE (1): for availability contact your local BTicino sales representative
(2) CONFIGURATOR TWEEZERS
(2): for systems with underground cable lines 3502 tweezers for the connection and the removal of
configurators (1)
MyHOME 269
KEY COVERS
KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING
FOR 1 FUNCTION FOR 2 FUNCTIONS
Axolute Livinglight Màtix Axolute Livinglight Màtix
HD4915 HD4915M2 N4915LN N4915M2LN AM5911* HD4911 HD4911M2 N4911N N4911M2N AM5911/2*
HC4915 HC4915M2 NT4915N NT4915N HC4911 HC4911M2 NT4911N NT4911M2N
HS4915 HS4915M2 L4915N L4915N HS4911 HS4911M2 L4911N L4911M2N
KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 1 FUNCTION KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 2 FUNCTIONS
1 module 2 modules 1 module 2 modules
Item Item Item Item
Axolute Axolute
HD4915 HD4915M2 HD4911 HD4911M2
HC4915 HC4915/2 HC4911 HC4911/2
HS4915 HS4915/2 HS4911 HS4911/2
Livinglight Livinglight
N4915LN N4915M2LN N4911N N4911M2N
NT4915N NT4915M2N NT4911N NT4911M2N
L4915N L4915M2N L4911N L4911M2N
Màtix Màtix
AM5911* AM5911/2* AM5911* AM5911/2*
* key-covers usable for 1 and 2 functions

NOTE: control keys are supplied with
the device as standard.
upper pushbutton
control
lower pushbutton button
LED
key cover
2 functions
2 modules
key cover
1 function
key cover 2 modules
key cover 2 functions
1 function 1 module
1 module
270 MyHOME
KEY COVERS
KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING FOR 1 FUNCTION
Axolute Livinglight Màtix
HD4915AA HC4915/2AA HS4915BA NT4915AN NT4915M2ADN NT4915MR AM5915AC AM5915/2AA AM5915BA
KEY-COVERS WITH 1 FUNCTION SYMBOL SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

1 module 2 modules 1 module 2 modules 1 module 2 modules
Description Item Item Item Item Item Item
HD4915AA HD4915M2AA — —
OFF HC4915AA HC4915/2AA — — AM5915AA AM5915/2AA
HS4915AA HS4915/2AA — —
HD4915AB HD4915M2AB — —
ON HC4915AB HC4915/2AB — — AM5915AB AM5915/2AB
HS4915AB HS4915/2AB — —
HD4915AC HD4915M2AC — —
GEN HC4915AC HC4915/2AC — — AM5915AC AM5915/2AC
HS4915AC HS4915/2AC — —
HD4915AD HD4915M2AD — N4915M2ADN
DIMMER HC4915AD HC4915/2AD — NT4915M2ADN AM5915AD AM5915/2AD
HS4915AD HS4915/2AD — L4915M2ADN
HD4915AE — N4915AEN —
BUTTON HC4915AE — NT4915AEN — AM5915AE —
HS4915AE — L4915AEN —
HD4915BA HD4915M2BA N4915AN N4915M2AN
ON-OFF HC4915BA HC4915/2BA NT4915AN NT4915M2AN AM5915BA AM5915/2BA
HS4915BA HS4915/2BA L4915AN L4915M2AN
— — N4915BN N4915M2BN — —
STAIRCASE LIGHT — — NT4915BN NT4915M2BN — —
— — L4915BN L4915M2BN — —
HD4915BL HD4915M2BL — — — —
BED LIGHT HC4915BL HC4915M2BL — — — —
HS4915BL HS4915M2BL — — — —
HD4915BB HD4915M2BB — —
BELL HC4915BB HC4915/2BB — — AM5915BB —
HS4915BB HS4915/2BB — —
HD4915BC HD4915M2BC — —
EXHAUST FAN HC4915BC HC4915/2BC — — — —
HS4915BC HS4915/2BC
HD4915BD HD4915M2BD N4915FN N4915M2FN
KEY HC4915BD HC4915/2BD NT4915FN NT4915M2FN AM5915BD —
HS4915BD HS4915/2BD L4915FN L4915M2FN
HD4915DD HD4915M2DD N4915DD N4915M2DD — —
DO NOT DISTURB HC4915DD HC4915M2DD NT4915DD NT4915M2DD — —
HS4915DD HS4915M2DD L4915DD L4915M2DD — —
— — N4915DN N4915M2DN — —
DOORBELL — — NT4915DN NT4915M2DN — —
— — L4915DN L4915M2DN — —
HD4915MR — N4915MR — — —
REARRANGE THE HC4915MR — NT4915MR — — —
ROOM
HS4915MR — L4915MR — — —
MyHOME 271
KEY COVERS
KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING FOR 1 FUNCTION
HD4911AF HD4911MAF HC4911BC NT4911AHN NT4911AIN NT4911BFN AM5911AF AM5911AI
KEY-COVERS WITH 2 FUNCTIONS SYMBOL SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

1 module 2 modules 1 module 2 modules 1 module 2 modules
Description Item Item Item Item Item Item
HD4911AF HD4911M2AF N4911AFN N4911M2AFN
ON - OFF - GEN HC4911AF HC4911/2AF NT4911AFN NT4911M2AFN AM5911AF (*) AM5911/2AF
HS4911AF HS4911/2AF L4911AFN L4911M2AFN
HD4911AG HD4911M2AG N4911AGN N4911M2AGN
ON - OFF HC4911AG HC4911/2AG NT4911AGN NT4911M2AGN AM5911AG AM5911/2AG
HS4911AG HS4911/2AG L4911AGN L4911M2AGN
HD4911AH HD4911M2AH N4911AHN N4911M2AHN
UP - DOWN HC4911AH HC4911/2AH NT4911AHN NT4911M2AHN AM5911AH AM5911/2AH
HS4911AH HS4911/2AH L4911AHN L4911M2AHN
HD4911AI HD4911M2AI N4911AIN N4911M2AIN
ON - OFF
HC4911AI HC4911/2AI NT4911AIN NT4911M2AIN AM5911AI (*) AM5911/2AI
ADJUSTMENT
HS4911AI HS4911/2AI L4911AIN L4911M2AIN
HD4911BA HD4911M2BA — — — —
ON-OFF HC4911BA HC4911/2BA — — — —
HS4911BA HS4911/2BA — — — —
HD4911BC HD4911M2BC — — — —
EXHAUST FAN HC4911BC HC4911/2BC — — — —
HS4911BC HS4911/2BC — — — —
HD4911BE — — — — —
SOL KEY HC4911BE — — — — —
HS4911BE — — — — —
HD4911AD — N4911ADN — — —
+ upward and
HC4911AD — NT4911ADN — — —
– downward
HS4911AD — L4911ADN — — —
SOUND SOURCE HD4911BF — N4911BFN —
CHANGE HC4911BF — NT4911BFN — AM5911BF (*) —
TRACK CHANGE HS4911BF — L4911BFN —
NOTE (*): key covers that can be used with Sound System devices as
well.
272 MyHOME
KEY COVERS
CUSTOMIZABLE LIVINGLIGHT KEY COVERS WITH LENS AVAILABLE IN KIT
CUSTOMIZABLE KEY COVERS 1 FUNCTION 2 FUNCTIONS

1 module 2 modules
Description Item Item
1 FUNCTION KEY COVER N4915TN N4915M2TN
CUSTOMIZABLE NT4915TN NT4915M2TN
WITH 1 LENS* L4915TN L4915M2TN
customizable customizable
2 FUNCTION KEY COVER N4911TN N4911M2TN with 1 lens with 2 lens
CUSTOMIZABLE NT4911TN NT4911M2TN
WITH 2 LENS L4911TN L4911M2TN
KIT OF LENS
Description Item
N4915KIT
KIT WITH THE COMPOSITION
SHOWN ASIDE NT4915KIT
(5 LENS EACH TYPE)
L4915KIT
KIT OF LENS
Description Item
KIT WITH THE COMPOSITION N4915KIT1
SHOWN ASIDE NT4915KIT1
(5 LENS EACH TYPE) L4915KIT1
KIT OF LENS
Description Item
KIT WITH THE LENS N4915SETBL
SHOWN ASIDE NT4915SETBL
(50 LENS) L4915SETBL
MyHOME 273
HOTEL OFFER RANGE
These pages contain the BUS devices dedicated to the implementation of solutions for hotels comfort and
temperature control. The offer includes many other types of devices common to other applications.
For more information see the Hotel Room Management section.
H4651 LN4651 H4650 LN4650
348402 HS4547 NT4547 H4653 LN4653
Item BADGE-HOLDER POCKET Item BADGE AND BADGE PROGRAMMER

Badge holder pocket for the activation of 3547 Badge in credit card format (ISO 50x80 mm). It
functions in the hotel room - slot lit by built- uses the transponder Mifare Classic ISO14443
in light - SCS-BUS connection - dimensions: 2 type A technology. To be used in combination
modules – to be completed with front cover in with the badge programmer 348402. The badge
the desired design can be customized and is sold in packs of 5 pieces.
H4649 Axolute Compatible with H4651 reader starting from
LN4649 Livinglight batch 14W40.
348402 Table-top badge programmer to be connected to
Badge holder pocket for the activation the PC at the reception.
of functions in the hotel room with RFID
recognition technology - slot lit by built-in light CONTROL INDICATORS FOR ROOM MANAGEMENT
- SCS-BUS connection - dimensions: 2 modules – to DO NOT DISTURB - REARRANGE THE ROOM
be completed with front cover in the desired indicator and Ringer button - connection to SCS-
design BUS - dimensions: 2 modules
H4648 Axolute H4650 Axolute
LN4648 Livinglight LN4650 Livinglight
FRONT COVERS FOR BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS Badge reader in RFID technology + DO NOT DISTURB
Front cover for traditional badge-holder pocket - REARRANGE THE ROOM indicator and Ringer button -
or SCS - 2 modules connection to SCS-BUS - dimensions: 2 modules
HD4547 Axolute H4651 Axolute
HC4547 LN4651 Livinglight
HS4547
N4547 Livinglight DO NOT DISTURB - REARRANGE THE ROOM control
NT4547 to be completed with key covers - connection to
L4547 SCS-BUS - dimensions: 2 modules
Front cover for traditional badge-holder pocket H4653 Axolute
or SCS - 3 modules LN4653 Livinglight
N4551 Livinglight
NT4551
L4551
NOTE: To request the integration with PMS using the FIAS protocol (e.g. Fidelio) contact the BTicino sales force.
274 MyHOME
HOTEL OFFER RANGE
MH201 F458 F459 3544SW

3546SW
Item SCENARIO MODULE IP Item DRIVER MANAGER

MH201 It manages scenarios for hotel rooms - F459 Integration platform to third-party systems - 6
operates as a gateway for Configuration DIN modules
and Supervision software - it is necessary
to install one for each room or zone To check the feasibility of specific integrations and to apply for the necessary
- connection on SCS-BUS or Ethernet network license for using the Driver manager contact the specialists of the "BTicino
- dimensions: 1 DIN module Systems Integration Service toll free number 800.837035.
SCENARIO MODULE SOFTWARE
F420 Device to store 16 scenarios for Automation, 3544SW Software license for the room status monitoring,
Sound System, Temperature control and Video for related basic management and for badges
Door Entry applications programming for Hotels up to 20 rooms
- 2 DIN modules Software license as above - for Hotels with over
3546SW
IP SERVER 20 rooms
F458 IP SERVER to use in case of systems with more
than 100 rooms or zones (over 100 MH201
installed). Dimensions: 6 DIN modules
MyHOME 275
BTicino SpA
Viale Borri, 231
www.bticino.com
21100 Varese - Italy
BTicino S.p.A. reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet
AD-EXMH16GT/GB - Edition 05/2016 and to communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
Guidelines for design and installation 2016
AND INSTALLATION
DESIGN
GUIDELINES FOR

Btcino Scs

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Btcino Scs

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BTicino SpA

Viale Borri, 231

Guidelines for design and installation 2016

LIGHTS AND AUTOMATION

ENERGY MANAGEMENT Temperature control – Consumption Display

SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND CONTROL

LIGHTS AND AUTOMATION

ENERGY CONSUMPTION DISPLAY

LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT

FUNCTIONS INTEGRATION AND CONTROL

8-key control Touch screen functions with

NUVO audio system

Systems of other manufacturers

LIGHTING AND GENERAL LOADS MANAGEMENT OF SCENARIOS 3

WINDOW AND SHUTTER MANAGEMENT 1

General control 8-key control

MyHOME_Screen 3,5: Touch screen MyHOME_Screen 10

NUVO audio system

Systems of other manufacturers:

Driver manager F459

through the use of a

bticino.it/integrazione_myhome/ DALI dimmer actuator

Control DIN module Built-in BUS

Crossover Web Server

automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan

1 Configuration 2 Physical configuration using

AN INTERFACE FOR EVERY NEED

Basic control Soft touch control Scenario control

Capacitive control Remote control Control with badge transponder

Interacting with MyHOME recalling preconfigured scenarios

MyHOME_Screen 10 represents the

Local display 1.2 MyHOME_Screen 3.5 MyHOME_Screen 10

ADVANCED CENTRAL CONTROL DEVICES

AXOLUTE Video display Mobile Vocal IPad with MyHOME application

DRESS AS YOU WANT

White Cobalt Green tea Coffee brown

Maple Titanium graphite Deep green Satin nickel

White NIGHTER Cherrywood Anthracite

White Tech gray Anthracite

Round Air Square Living Inter-

White Tech gray Anthracite

Elliptical Square Air

MyHOME_Web: PORTAL FOR REMOTE

HOME - MyHOME system REMOTE ACCESS

MyHOME_Web is an innovative MyHOME_Web IS DIVIDED INTO TWO AREAS:

CONNECTION SAFETY AND PROTECTION

Create a living space with

TO ENSURE ENERGY EFFICIENCY.

HEATING ONLY WHEN

SWITCH OFF THE LIGHT,

A COMPLETE CONSUMPTION AND

THE END OF THE BLACK-OUT.

ENERGY EFFICIENCY MANAGEMENT DEVICES

Probe Probe con display

99 zone central unit

Room-by-room temperature control

Splitter management Splitter

Photovoltaic Solar thermal

Pulse counter Pulse counter

Automatic switching off of heating when windows are Irrigation management

MyHOME_Screen 3.5 KWh

Lights and Automation MyHOME 19

Introduction to the light system and shutter automation

Basic contacts General Touch control